Digital PDFs

EK-640EB-MG-002

July 1990

371 pages

Original

13MB

view download

OCR Version

11MB

view download

Document:	VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance
Order Number:	EK-640EB-MG
Revision:	002
Pages:	371
Original Filename:

OCR Text

109.9.9.9.9.9.9.9.0.0$.89.6.80.00800000003¢06800080004006¢090.8090.0f
09,0.9.9,0,9.0,04.8.¢.9.00.960.9¢9.0046060§066990¢0060¢060.0¢6044

0.8:0.9.8.0.0.0.6600.0.0.0.00908.06680000080:600.9.6¢9068000.001

18.2.6.9,0.9.0.6.5.9.0.009.950$¢60900660666600.9000800900004
19.9,9,0.0.0.0.0,0.6.0.808,#8.0.88¢66.6:9000068¢8064¢6046¢04

LSS 0,8008/00.0.0.06:06.9.040¢6680680000609.049.0.0009
F0.8.0.0.6.0.8.0.6.6.¢.0.6¢.8:08.¢00¢60.$004006:669996004
9.0,8.9.0..9.0.0.0.0.0/6.8.0.0.¢.8.4.9¢.¢¢800685808400¢1
LG9 4,008 0.0 D0 $6.80.0,0.6.0.0.8.9.00.086.9999$6¢1
019.9,9.9.8.9:0.9,0.0.9.9.0.9.9.9.¢.0.9.9.0.010.6,6,9.0960.¢:9.¢
19.9,0/9,0,8.90,6.0.9.8.0.0.8.6:5.6.9.¢.6.4,6.9.6.6.0¢,0.0.:¢

00 0.0.9.0.9.4.00,0060.0.00 8066060000

200.0.9.9.9.0.0¢088¢¢000066064900¢4
D10.0.6,9.6.9.8.9.0.0.9.9.9.6.0.¢.0.¢¢6609
04
F8.9.0.8.0.00.60,000.08¢8¢046664

19.0.4.0.0.6,0.6,0,0.0.0.66.9¢09044
.9.9.9.0.6.9.¢.0.0.419.¢,¢,¢,¢0¢64

10.9.8.0,6,9.0.0.9.9.9.0,0,0.04.4
$.9.0.0.8.0.¢.6:0.0.99.,9.0¢
D1€.0.0.9.0.6,4,6.¢,¢9,0¢4

.0.9.0.9:0,9.9.9.4
¢4
10.9.4.6.4.9:6.44
XY XKEHK

XUHAN

XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX
b.0.9.9.9.5.04
KXXAXAUKXX

XXXHAXXAXAX

EXXA
XX XX XA XA
KXXAAX
XA XK
KH
XXX

$.9.0.6,0.0.9.9.8.0.4.9.¢.¢.¢944
$16,0.00.0.6.6.0.0.4.45.0.6.69644

[08.6,8.0.8.60.0.08¢66.6.9¢
4044

09.0.90.9.9.8.09.¢.9.0.9.4¢6.9.0.¢40004
19.0:9.6.¢.6,0.6.0.6.0.6.0.0.9.9.4.4.6.9.60044

§19,9:0.0.9.0.4,9.4.9.0.0.0.9.04.0¢65.0¢0¢
44
$9.0.4.8.9.9.6.0.0.6,¢.6.0.9.09.06.0.66$0.¢506644
§0.5.0.9.0.9.0.6.0.8.09.69.0.0.0.0.006$060.900634
9.0,0,9.6.0,69009.0.4.0.09.690.8¢0$0860060044
9.0,0.0.0.0.0.6.6.0.0.0.0.6.900.404.¢0.0.400$0.66.6.¢.91

H0.8,0.0.0.0.60.4.0.00.6
56600608
.0.0.8.6644
660¢00708
19./0.0.0.6.0.9.0.¢.0.0.9.0:0.0.90.9.5.09.98840.600.60640.00
000.9,0.6.6.00.$.9.68¢8.00.6:0.0¢69,990960006$0¢6669¢94

$9.0,0.0.0.8,€.6:0.0.0.0.0.9.4.9.0.9.0.9.0,6.0.0.0.0.9.6.0.9.0.0.0.4.0.0.0.9,¢9.6¢¢

019:0.0:0.0.8:9.0.0,0.6.8.0.$.0.0.0.0.0.9.30.¢:6.4.60.6.6.6.9.6.9.0.0.6:0.0.9:0.9:9.0.94
0.9,8.9.6,6,0,8,0.0,0,0.0,0.6.609.09:9.99.0.9.69.6$6070,00.069:0$.6.0.69¢91

$19:0.9.0,:0.8.8.0.9.9.8.0.9.8.0.8.9,0.0,9.0:6.0.0.9.0.6.0,09.0:0.6.0.8960.69.0:0.6.0.9.9.694
210.9.0.9,0,0.0.9,0.0.6.8.9.0,00.6.9.0.9.0.9.6:680.6$.0.6.6.06.0¢606086400.0:9:0.:994

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Order Number EK-640EB~-MG~002

This manual is intended for Digital customer service
representatives. It covers the installation of modules
and removal and replacement of field-replaceable units

(FRUs).

digital equipment corporation
maynard, massachusetts

Firet Printing, July 1989
Revised, June 1990

The information ir this document is subject to chiange without notice and should not be
construed is 8 commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Dhgita] Equipment Corporainon sssumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this document.

The scftware,
if any, described in this document is furnished under
a license and may
be used
or copied only in sccordance with the terms of such license. No responsibility is assumed
for the use or reliability of eoftware or equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment
Corporation or its affiliated companies.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equ:pment Corporation:

DEBNA

PDP

VAXciuster

DEC
DEC LANcontroller

ULTRIX
UNIBUS

VAXELN
VMS

DECnet

VAX

pot

DECUS

VAXBI

manuan‘

PCC NOTICE: The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and may emit
radio frequency energy. The equipment hae been type tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which

are designed to provide ressonable protection against such radio frequency interference when
operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment 1n & residential area
may cauee interference, in which case the user at his own expense may be required to take
measures to correct the interference.

Contents
Preface

Chapter 1

Introduction

1.1

System Physical Description .. .......................

1-2

System Functional Description

.. .....................

1-6

VAX6000400FrontView ...........................

1-8

VAX6000400RearView............................

1-10

Field-Replaceable Units . .. ..........................

1-12

Chapter 2

Diagnostics

2.1

DiagnosticOverview

..............
... ...

Self-Test ... ......... .

2.3

ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor Program

2-2

...............

2-6

. . .................

2-8

231

RBD Monitor Control Characters.

232

START Command

. ...........
... ... ...,

2-10

233

START Command Qualifiers . . .....................

2-11

234

RBD Test Printout, Passing . . . ... . .................

2-14

235

RBD Test Printout, Failing .. ......................

2-16

236

SUMMARY Command ....................c..uu...

2-18

23.7

Sample RBD Session . . ................
.. ... .....

2-20

238

Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices . . . ..

2-24

VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ... ...............

2-26

241

Running VAX/DS . . ... ... .. ... . . .. ...

2-28

242

Sample VAX/DS Session . . . ... ...

2-30

243

VAX/DSDiagnostics . ............ ...t

2-36

Chapter 3

KAG64A Scalar Processor

KAG64A Physical Description and Specifications . . ... ......
KAG64A ConfigurationRules . . ... .....................
..........
... .....
Functional Deseription . . . . .......
BootProcessor .......... ...t
...
... ... .c.0iiien..
Power-UpSequence ............
KAG64A Self-Test Results: Console Display . . . ............
KAG64A Self-Test Results: Module LEDs . ...............
KAG4A Self-Test Results: XGPR Register ... ............
ROM-BasedDiagmostics. . .. .........................
..
... ... ......
KAG64A Self-Test—RBD O ..............
CPU/Memory Interaction Tests —RBD1 .. .............
..
VAX/DSDiagnostics . . ... . ......c.ooiiiiinnnnn
..
MachineChecks . . ... ... ... ... .. ... .. ...
...
... ......
ConsoleCommands ............
KA64A Handling Procedures . . .......................
How to Replace the Only Processor ....................
How to Replace the Boot Processor ... .................
How to Add a New Processor or Replace a Secondary
PrOCEBBOT . . . . .t
319 PATCH EEPROM Command .........................
...
... ... iiniinirnnnn.
....
...
320 KAG4ARegisters ....

3.1
32
3.3
34
35
3.6
3.7
3.8
39
3.10
3.11
312
3.13
314
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18

Chapter 4
4.1
42
43
44
4.5
46
4.7
48

49
4.10
4.11

3-2
34
3-6
3-10
3-12
3-16
3-18
3-22
3-24
3-26
330
3-32
334
3-36
3-38
342
3-44

346
348
3-50

FV64A Vector Processor

FV64A Physical Description and Specifications . . .........
.
... ..
KAG64A/FV64A Coprocessors. .. ................
FV64A ConfigurationRules . . ........................
.
... .. ... ......
.......
Functional Deseniption . . .....
Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED . . . . ..
Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register . . . .............

Vector Processor Tests—RBD Oand RBD1 .. ... ... ......
VAXDSDiagnostics ... ............ouiviiniiirneeneen.

4-2
44
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16

... ... ... .. .. . ...t 4-17
MachineChecks........
Vector Console Commands . .......................... 4-18
FV64A Handling Procedures . ... ..................... 4-22

412

How to Replace a VectorModule . . . ...................

4-26

413

Vector Processor Registers . . ...

4-28

Chapter 5

... ................

MS62A Memory

MS3S62A Descraption

5-2

MS62A ConfigurationRules . . .. ......................

MS62A Specifications . .. ..........
... .. ...,

5-5

MS62A Functional Description

5-6

MS62A Interleaving.

... ... .. . ...,

5-8

InterleavingExamples..............................

5-10

Console Commands for Interleaving

... . ...............

5-12

MemorySelf-Test ... . ... ... ... .. . . ... ... ... ...

5-14

Memory Self-Test Errors ... ....... ... ................

5-16

510

MS62A Memory Tests—RBD 3...

... ... ... .. .......
...

5-18

511

Memory Tests (RBD 3/Examples.

. . ... .........
... .. .

5~20

512

MS62A Control and Status Registers.

. . ... ......
... ....

5-22

513

MS62A Memory Installation ... ...

... .. ... .. .. .....

5-24

Chapter 6
6.1

.. ... ...

......

...

.. .....................

...

DWMBA XMI-to-VAXBI Adapter

DWMBA Physical Descnption . . . ... ... ..... ... ... ....

611

Physical Layout . . . ...

6.1.2

DWMBA Specifications . .... ...

DWMBA Functivnal Description . . . ...

6.3

DWMBA ConfigurationRules

DWMBATeste—RBD2 .

DWMBARegsters ..

Chapter 7
7.1

... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ...

6-2

... ......

... .......

6-6

.. .......
... ... .........

6-8

.. .. ...

... .. ...

6-2

... ...

. .. . ... ... ...... ...

6-10

... ............
. ... ...

6-12

XMI Card Cage

XMl Card Cage Description . .. ... ... ...
... .. ...

... ... .......

7-2

711

SystemUse . ...

. . .. ...

7-2

712

XMI Card Cage Specifications . . . ...................

XMICard CageRemoval ... ... ... ... ........
... .. ...

7-6

721

Prepare for Removal

... ...

... ...........
... ... ...

7-6

722

Removal of XMI Card Cage from Cabinet . ... ... .. ....

7-8

Switching XMICardCages . .........................
73
Removal of Bus Bars and DaughterCard ... ..........
7.3.1
Moving XMI Side Mounting Plates and Installation of
7.3.2
e
e
PartS . . . . e
XMICard Cage Replacement . . . ......................
74
Installing Modules in the XMI Card Cage . . . .. .. ........
7.5
XMI Troubleshooting . .........................c....
76

Chapter 8

7-12
7-14
7-16
7-18

VAXBI Card Cage

VAXBI Card Cage Description . . ......................
8.1
.
ttt
...
...
......
SystemUse ...
811
VAXBI Card Cage Specifications . ...................
8.12
VAXBI Card Cage Subassemblies. . .. ................
813
.........
......
VAXBI Card CageRemoval . . .........
8.2
Prepare for Removal ... . ... ...... ... ... ..........
821
Removal of VAXBI Card Cages from Cabinet . . .. . ... ...
822
Switching VAXBICages. ... . ........................
83
Removal of VAXBI Bus Bars . .. .. e
8.31
....
Removal of Other VAXBI Parta . ...............
832
Installationof VAXBI Parts . . ......................
833
VAXBI Card Cage Replacement . . ...... ... ..........
84
VAXBI Expansion and Configuration Rules . . .. ..........
8.5
..........
.....
... ...
VAXBI Troubleshooting ... .....
86

Chapter 9

7-10
7-11

8-2
8-2
84
86
8-8
8-8
8-10
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-16
8-18
8-20
8-22

Control Subsystem Assemblies
9-2
94
9-6
9-8
9-10

9.1
92
93
94
9.5

System Control Assembly Specifications . .. .............
System Control Assembly Removal and Replacement . . .. ..
XTC Power Sequencer Specifications .. .................
XTC Removal and Replacement . . . ....................
Control Panel Assembly Specifications . . . . ..............

9.7
9.8

TK Tape Drive Specifications . . ....................... 9-14
TK Tape Drive Removal and Replacement . . .. ........... 9-16

9.6

Contro! Panel Assembly Removal and Replacement ....... 9-12

Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Specifications

9.10

Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Removal and
Replacement. . . ... ... ... ... ... . ... ..

9-20

10.1

rower Subsystem Design ............................

10-2

10.2

Power Specifications. . ...........
.. ... ... o
L

104

103

PowerModules.

10-6

104
10.5

H7214 Power Regulator . ............................ 10-8
H7214 Power Regulator Removal and Replacement . . ... ... 10-10

106

H7215Power Regulator .. ....................
... .... 10-12

10.7

H7215 Power Regulator Removal and Replacement . . .. .. .. 10-14

108

H7206 Powerand LogicUnit . .. ...

Chapter 10

Power Subsystem

. .. ... ... ...

... ... i

... .............. 10-16

108.1

Specifications . . ............. . 10-16

10.8.2

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Switches and Indicators. . . . 10~18

10.9

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Removal and Replacement. . . . 10-20

10.10 H7206 Fan Removal and Replacement . . . ... ... ......... 10-22
10.11 H405 AC Power Controller. . . ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... 10-24

10.12 H405 AC Power Controller Removal and Replacement . . . .. 10-26

10.13 50 Hz Transformer . . . ... .........
.. .. ... v, 10-28
10.14 50 Hz Transformer Removal and Replacement .........
.. 10-30
10.15 H7231-N Battery BackupUmit . . . . ..... ... ... ......... 10-32

10.16 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Removal and Replacement .. 10-34
10.17 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Installation .. ............ 10-36
10.17.1

Install the Battery Backup Unit Cables . .. ... ... ...... 10-37

10.17
2 Install the Mounting Bracket . . . .. .................. 10-38

10173

Installthe Urut . ... ... .. ... . ... ... .. ... . . .. ... 10-39

Chapter 11

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

111

Door and Filter Removal and Replacement (Front) ........

11-2

11.2

Door and Filter Removal and Replacement (Rear) . . .. ....

114

11.3

Airflow Sensor Removal and Replacement . .. ............

11-6

114

Temperature Sensor Removal and Replacement .. ........

11-8

11.5

Blower Assembly Specifications . . . .................... 11-10

116

Blower Assembly, FrontandRear .. .................
.. 11-12

11.7

Blower Assembly Removal and Replacement . . .. ... ...... 11-14

vil

11.8

SidePanel Removal .. . ... ... ...... ................ 11-16

Appendix A

Troubleshooting
the System

Appendix B

Console Error Messages

Appendix C

Cable List

Appendix D

XMI Backplane Connectors

Appendix E

Parse Trees

Glossary

Index

Examples
2-1

Sample Self-Test Results . . ... ... ....................

2-2

START Command .................
... ... ..........

2-10

2-3

RBD Test Pmintout, Passing . . ........................

2-14

2-4

RBD Test Printout, Faibing

. . .........
... ... ......
..

2-16

2-5

SUMMARY Command ... . ..........................

2-18

2-6

Sample RBD Sesgion, Part

10of2......................

2-20

2-7

Sample RBD Session, Part 20f2...................
...

2-22

2-8

VAXBIRBD Session..............
... ... .. cccuvun.

2-24

2-9

Running Stand-AloneVAX/DS ........................

2-28

2-10 Running VAX/DSinUserMode ... ....................

2-29

2-11

..................

2-30

2-12 Sample VAX/DS Session, Part20f3 ................
...

2-32

2-13 Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 30of3 ... ................

2-34

vili

Sample VAX/DS Session, Part

1of3

3-1

ROM and EEPROM Version Numbers . ... ..............

3-8

3-2

Self-TestResults ..........
... ... . ... ... .. iiui..

3-16

3-3

XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure ... ..........

3-22

3-4

KA64A Self-Test—RBDO....... .....................

3-26

3-5

Running KA64A Self-Test (RBD 0) on a Secondary Processor

3-27

CPU/Memory Interaction Teste—RBD 1 ................

3-30

3-7

VAX/DS Commands for Running Stand-Alone Processor
Diagnostics. . ... ...
e

3-32

3-8

Replacinga SingleProcessor .. .. .....................

342

3-9

ReplacingBootProcessor ............................

344

3-10 Adding or Replacing Secondary Processor ...............

3-46

3-11

PATCHEEPROM Command .........................

348

4-1

Self-TestResults

........................ciinnn.

4-10

4-2

XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure . . .. .. .......

4-12

4-3

Runmng RBD 0 on a Secondary Processor with an Attached

Vector Processor . . .. ...........

4-14

4-4

VAX/DS Commands for Testing Vector Processors . ........

4-16

5-1

SET MEMORY and INITIALIZE Commands. . . .. ........

5-12

5-2

MS62A Memory Module Results in Self-Test . .. .. ... ... ..

5-14

5~-3

MS62A Memory Module Node Exclusion . . ..............

5-16

5-4

RBD 3—All Modules with Halton Error . . ............
..

520

5-5

RBD3—Confirm Switch. .. ... ...

.. ... ..............

5~20

RBD 3—Parameter ... ... ... ... . ... ... ... .. ...

5-21

6-1

DWMBATests—RBD2 ....... ...... ... ...

... .....

6-10

1-1

Typical VAX 6000400 System . . . . ... ... ..............

1-2

VAX 6000400 System Architecture . . . . ................

1-6

1-3

VAX 6000-400 System (Front View). . .. ................

1-8

1-4

VAX 6000400 System (Rear View) . ...................

1-10

2-1

DuagnosticsDesign. . ...... ... ... ... . ..o

2-2

KAB4AModule.

. ... ... ... . .

3-2

Typical KA64A Configuration. . . . .....................

3-3

KA64ABlockDiagram . ... ... ... ... ...

3-6

3-4

Selectionof Boot Processor. ... .......................

3-10

3-5

KA64A Power-Up Sequence, Part 1of2.................

312

IS
A

KA64A Power-Up Sequence, Part 20f2.................
KAG4A LEDs After Power-Up Self-Test . ... .............
3-7
The Stack in Response to a Machine Check . ... ..........
Holding the KA64AModule . ... ......................
3-9
.. ..
3-10 Inserting the KA64A Module in an XMI Card Cage. ...
it
FV64A Module (Side 1) .. .. ... ... ... ... . .
FV64A Module (Side 2) .. . . ... .. ... i
4-2

VAX 6000400 Vector Processing System . . . . ............

3-14
3-18
334
3-38
340
4-2
43
44

4-6
Scalar/Vector Configurations . ........................
48
FV64ABlock Diagram . .. .. ......... ...
XGPRRegister . . . ...t 4-12
The Stack in Response to a Machine Check . . ............ 4-17
4-7
... 4-22
......
Holding the ¥V64A Module . .. ..............
Inserting the FV64A Module in an XMI Card Cage . . .. . ... 4-24
4-9
4-10 Replacing a Vector Module in an XMI Card Cage ......... 4-26
5-2
MS62A Module (Side 1) . ... ... ... ...
5-6
...
.. .....
Simphfied Block Diagram .. ..............
e 5-10
2WaylInterleaving. . ....... ... ... ... ...
. ... .. .. 5-10
....
...
4WaylInterleaving. . . ....
8WaylInterleaving . . .. ........ ... ... it 5~11
6-2
...,
... ... ..
....
DWMBA/AXMIModule. . .......
6-3
..
.. ..covin..
DWMBA/BVAXBIModule . . . ..........
6-2
66
DWMBA XMI-to-VAXBI Adapter Block Diagram . .........
6-3
6-8
VAX 6000—400 Slot Numbers . . .......................
7-2
XMI Card Cage Connections . ........................
7-1
i 74
XMICard Cage ........ ...t
7-2
7-6
XMI Backplane Cables and Power Connections . . .. .......
7-3
7-8
74
XMICard Cage . .. ... ... it
XMI Bus Bar Assembly and Daughter Card ............. 7-10
7-5
7-6
XMI Cage Side Mounting Plates . ..................... 7-12
Installation of Foam Air Seals .. ...................... 7-13
7-7
XMICard Cage ...........coiniiniuiminnneennennns 7-14
7-8
... 7-16
....
.. ...
7-9
Numbering of XMI Slots ... ............
8-2
VAXBI Card Cage Connections . ......................
8-1
84
VAXBICard Cages...............oiiinirnenannann.
8-2
8-6
VAXBI Card Cage Subassemblies. . ....................
8-3

VAXBI Backplane Cables and Power Connections . ........

8-8

VAXBICardCages...............

.....'iiuiuinun..

8-10

VAXBIBusBarAssembly ...........................

8-12

8-7

VAXBI Backplane Components .......................

8-14

8-8

VAXBI Cage MountungPlates ... .........
...... ......

8-15

8-9

Installationof

Foam AirSeals . ... ....................

8-16

8-10 VAXBICardCages . .. ..............
i iiiiininnnn..

8-18

8-11

Numberingof VAXBISlots. .. ........................

8-20

9-1

System Control Assembly ...........................

9-2

System Control Asse:nbly Removal ....................

9-3

XTC Power Sequencer ..................ccuuieiinnnn.

9-6

9-4

XTC Power Sequencer Removal . ......................

9-8

9-5

Control Panel Assembly . ............................

9-10

9—6

Control Panel Assembly Removal . . .. ... ... .............

9-12

9-7

TKTapeDrive ... ..

... ... ... . .. . . .. ...

9-14

TKTapeDriveRemoval . ............................

5-16

9-9

Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery . . .................

9-18

9-10

Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Removal . ... ........

9-20

10-1

Power Subsystem Design ...........
... ...............

10-2

DC Power Regulators in Cabinet (Rear View) ............

104

10-3

Location of Power Modules (Rear View) . . ...............

10-6

104

H7214 Power Regulators (Rear View) ..................

10-8

10-5

H7214 Power Regulator Removal . . . ... .........
.. ... ... 10-10

10-6

H7215 Power Regulators (Rear View) . ................. 10-12

10-7

H7215 Power Regulator Removal . . . . ... ... ............ 10-14

10-8

H7206 Power and Logic Unit (Rear View) .. ............. 10-16

10-9

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Switches and Indicators. . . . .. 10-18

10-10 H7206 Power and Logic Unit Removal (Top View) . ... ... .. 10-20
10-11H7206 FanRemoval . . . ............................. 10-22
10-12 H405 AC Power Controller (Rear View) . .. . ...........
.. 10-24
10-13 H405 AC Power Controller Removal .................
.. 10-26
10-14 50 Hz Transformer (Front View)

10-1550 Hz Transformer Removal

. ..................... 10-28

......................... 10-30

10-16 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit (Rear View) ... ... ........ 10-32
10-17 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Removal ................ 10-34
10-18 Battery Backup Unit Cable Installation. . ............... 10-36

10-19 Mounting Bracket Installation . . ...................... 10-38
10-20 Battery Backup Unit Installation. . .................... 10-39
... ... ..... 11-2
11-1 FrontDoor (InsideView) ................
11-2 RearDoor (InsideView) .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... 0. 114
11-3 Arflow Sensor (FrontView) . . ... ... ... ... ........ 11-6
perature Sensor (Front View) ..................... 11-8
114
i 11-10
11-5 E werdssembly ....... ... .. ... . ... .
11-6 FrontBlower . ........ ... .0ttt iiiinnnnnns 11-12
11-7 RearBlower . . ......... it 11-13
11-3 Blower Assembly Removal (Rear View) . ................ 11-14
11-9 Side Panel Removal (Front View)...................... 11-16
D- 1 XMI Backplane Connector Numbering . . ................ D-1
E-. KA64A Machine Check Parse Tree. . .. ................. E-2
E-5
E-- KAG64A Hard Error Interrupt Parse Tree . . . . ............
E-3 KAG64A Soft Error Interrupt Parse Tree . . .. . ............ E~7
E-9
E-4 FV64A Machine Check Parse Tree . . . ..................
E-5 FV64A Hard Error Interrupt Parse Tree . . . ............. E-10
E-6 FV64A Soft Error Interrupt Parse Tree . .. .............. E-11
E-7 FV64A Disable Fault Parse Tree . ... ... ............... E-12
Tables

1-1
1-2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6

2-7
2-8
3~-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5

VAX 6000—400 System Charactenistics. .. . ..............
Field-ReplaceableUnits . . . ..........................
Self-TestComponents...............................
RBDMonitorCommands . ...........................
ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs .....................
RBD Monitor Controi Characters. . . ...................
START Command Qualifiers .........................
VAX Diagnostic Program Levels.......................

VAX/DS Documentation .................... .o
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ..................
KAG64A Specifications .. . ...
KAG4AErmorLEDs ............cuiiiiiininnns
...
i
XMIBaseAddresses ..................
Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers ...............
ROM-Based Diagnostics. . ..................... e

1-4
1-12
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-11
2-26

2-26
2-36
3-3
3-20
3-23
3-23
3-24

KA64A Self-Test—RBD O .......
..... ... ...........
3-7

CPU/Memory Interaction Tests—rtBD 1
KAG64A VAX/DS Diagnostics

................

..........................

3-9

Machine Check Parameters

3-10

Console Commands . ..................
. . iiuirnnnn.

3-11

KAG64A Internal Processor Registers

3~12

XMI Registers forthe KAG4A .. ......................

3-13

KAG4A Registers in XMI Private Space

4-1

FV64A Specifications . .. . ...

....... ... .ot

4-2

Processor Module Combinations.

. . . ...................

4-3

Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers ...............

--------------------------

-------------------

Vector Processor Tests in Self-Test—RBD O .. ............
4-5

Vector Tests in CPU/Memory Interaction Tests—RBD 1

.. ..

FV64A VAX/DS Diagnostics . . .. ... ...,
4-7

FV64A Machine Check Parameters

....................

Vector Console Commands ... ........................
4-9

FV64A Internal Processor Registers

.. .. ...............

5-1

Memory Configurations for the XMI Backplane

5-2

MS62A Specifications

5-3

Interleaving ... ....... ...

...............................

Memory Tests — RBD 3

... ..

.............................

5-18

RBD3Parameters . ..............0.uiiiieinennnann.

5-19

MS62A Memory Control and Status Registers

5-22

Interlock FlagRegisters . . ..... ...

5-23

6-1

DWMBA/A XMI Module Specifications. .. ...............

6-2

DWMBA/B VAXBI Module Specifications

6--3

DWMBACables .. ... ...... .. ...

5-5

DWMBA Configuration

6-5

... ... ... ...... ...

................

. i

...................
... .......

DWMBA XMI-to-VAXBI Adapter RBD Tests

.............

6-9
6-11

..............ccounimuienninneenonn.

6-12

DWMBAXMIRegisters . ............................

6-13

7-1

XMI Card Cage Assembly Specifications

7-2

XMICard CageCables. . . .........
... ..............

7-5

7-3

XMI Troubleshooting Checklist .. ..................

7-18

7-4

XMI Connector Cleaning Supplies . . ...................

7-19

8-1

VAXBI Card Cage Asscmbly Specifications . .............

VAXBI Registers

................

-4

xlii

85
8-2 VAXBICardCageCables............................
8-7
8-3 VAXB! Subassemblies and Tools Required . . ... ..........
8-4 VAXBI Troubleshooting Checklist ..................... 8-22
8-5 VAXBI Connector Cleaning Supplies ................... 8-23
9-3
9-1 System Control Assembly Specifications ................
9-7
9-2 XTC Power Sequencer Specifications . ..................
9-3 Control Panel Assembly Specifications . . ... ............. 9-11
9-4 TK Tape Drive Assembly Specifications . ... ............. 9-15
..., 9-19
.....
...
9-5 Filter Board Specifications . ... .......
9-6 TOY Clock Battery Specifications ..................... 9-19
10-1 XMI Side—DC Output Specifications . ... .. ............. 10-5
10-2 VAXBI Side—DC Output Specifications . . .. ............. 10-5
.. 10-5
... ... .
.....
10-3 AC Output Specifications . . . ........
10-4 PowerModules...............oiiiiiininnnan. 10-7
10-5 H7214 Power Regulator Specifications . . . .. ............. 10-9
10-6 H7215 Power Regulator Specifications . . .. .............. 10-13
10-7 H7206 Power and Logic Unit Specifications . . ............ 10-17
10-8 H405 AC Power Controller Specifications ............... 10-25
10-9 50 Hz Transformer Specifications. . . ... ................ 10-29
10-10 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Specifications ............ 10-33
11-1 Front Cabinet Door and Air Filter Specifications . . .. ...... 11-3
11-2 Rear Cabinet Door and Air Filter Specifications .......... 11-5
... 11-6
....
11-3 Airflow Sensor Specifications . .................
11-4 Temperature Sensor Specifications. . ................... 11-9
11-5 Blower Assembly Specifications . ...................... 11-11
. 11-17
... ...
.....
11-6 Side Panel Specifications . .. ........
A-1 Troubleshootingthe System .. ........................ A-2
B-1 Console Error Messages IndicatingHalt . .. ............. B-1
B-2 Standard Consocle Error Messages . .. .................. B-3
iiiiiaanann C-1
C-1 CableList .......... ...ttt

xiv

Preface

intended Audience
This manual is written ifor Digital customer service representatives
servicing the VAX 6000—400 system. This manual covers the installation
of modules and removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs,).

Document Structure
The manuals in the VAX 6000—400 documentation set are designed using
structured documentation theory. Each topic has a boldface indented
abstract, to help you use the manual as a reference tool. Other typical
components of a topic include an illustration or example, a chart or list,
and descriptive text.
This manual has 11 chapters and six appendixes:

Chapter 1, Introduction, gives an overview of the system, including
system specifications, field-replaceable units, system architecture, and
location of major assemblies.

Chapter 2, Diagnostics, describes the VAX 6000—400 self-test and
the general methods for running ROM-based diagnostics and software
diagnostics under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor.

Chapter 3, KAG4A Scalar Processor, Chapter 4, FV64A Vector
Processor, Chapter 5, MS62A Memory,, and Chapter 6, DWMBA
Adapter, give meodule specifications, configuration rules, main
registers, module diagnostics, and self-test information.

Chapter 7, XMI Card Cage, and Chapter 8, VAXBI Card Cage,
describe the system card cage and the /O card cage, respectively, and
their removal and replacement procedures.

Chapter 9, Control Subsystem Assemblies, presents the four
subassemblies housed in the s, stem control assembly area and gives
the removal and replacement instructions for each subassembly.

Chapter 10, Power Subassemblies, discusses each field-replaceable
unit of the power system, its diagnostics, and the removal and
replacement procedure for the unit.
Chapter 11, Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem, presents the fieldreplaceable units that are specific to the cabinet and their ;emoval and

replacement instructions.

Appendix A is a troubleshooting chart. Appendix B lists the console
error messages. Appendix C is the cable list. Appendix D shows the
pin numbering of XMI backplane connectors. Appendix E gives the
parse trees for the KA64A and FV64A processor modules. A Glossary
and Index provide additional reference support.

Conventions Used in This Document
The icons shown below are used for designating part placement in VAX
¢ J00—400 systems. A shaded area in the icon shows the location of the
component or part being discussed.

U
s

,"\
e

7 o
(=]

FRONT

xvl

REAR

VAX 6000-400 Documents
Documents in the VAX 6000-400 documentation set include:
Title

Order Number

VAX 6000—400 Installation Guide

EK-640EA-IN

VAX 6000—400 Owner’s Manual

EK-640EA-OM

VAX 6000-400 Mini-Reference

EK-640EA-HR

VAX 6000-400 System Technical User’s Guide

EK-640EB-TM

VAX 6000-400 Options and Matntenance

EK-640EB-MG

VAX 6000 Series Upgrade Manual

EK-600EB-UP

VAX 6000 Serwes Vector Processor Qwner’s Manual

EK-60VAA-OM

VAX 6000 Serwes Vector Processor Programmer’s Guide

EK-60VAA-PG

Associated Documents
Other documents that you may find useful include:
Title

Order Number

CIBCA User Guide

ER-CIBCA-UG

DEBNI Installation Guide

EK-DEBNI-IN

Guude to Maintaining a VMS System

AA-LA34A-TE

Guide to Setting Up a VMS System

AA-LA25A-TE

HSC Installation Manual

EK-HSCMN-IN

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver Installation
Manual

EK-H4000-IN

7231 Battery Backup Unut User's Guide

EK-H7231-UG

Installing and Using the VT320 Videc Terminal

EK-VT320-UG

Introduction to VMS System Management

AA-LA24A-TE

KDBS50 Dusk Controller User’s Guide

EK-KDB50-UG

RAS0 Disk Drive User ~uide

EK~ORA90-UG

RV20 Optical Dish Owner's Manual

EK~ORV20-OM

xvil

Title

Order Number

SC008 Star Coupler User's Guide

EK-8C008-UG

TK70 Streaming Tape Drive Owner’s Manual

EK-OTK70-OM

TUS81/TA81 and TU81 PLUS Subsystern User’s Guide

EK-TUAB81-UG

ULTRIX-32 Guide to System Exerasers

AA-KS95B-TE

VAX Archuecture Reference Manual

EY-3459E-DP

VAX Systems Hardware Handbook — VAXBI Systems

EB-31692-46

VAX Vector Prooessing Handbook

EC-H0419-46

VAXBI Expander Cabinet Insiallation Guide

EK-VBIEA-IN

VAXBI Options Handbook

EB-32255-46

VMS Installation and Operations: VAX 6000 Series

AA-LB36B-TE

VMS Networking Manual

AA-LA4BA-TE

VMS System Manager's Manual

AA-LAOOA-TE

VM5 VAXcluster Manual

AA-LA27A-TE

VMS Version 5.4 Naw and Changed Features

AA-MG29C-TE

Manual

xvit

000806098 03¢800 060800080000090080600.0000808640080808¢04

§0.0.9.0.60.000.860.00¢860800063.060006000900¢600886848069044
04.0.00.0.0.990.0889000900086060080860000¢¢¢000080000¢4
J0.0.0.0.09.620000.0000
6668688604 0808660608000900094
}0.0.6.00.60960.00.60.68
80800 80808086806¢804000800,4

PO8.90.00090.90908¢.0.89990608080000¢900000¢4¢0,4
$0.9.0.0.9.960.9008648600084680008006000800¢9604
1$.0.8.0006$0900666600063000008¢80808008494
116.0.0..9.8.0,0.0.0.0060.69.6000008808850980804!

p9:8.0.0.9.9.6.8.¢.0.6.0.060809.6800050.60808084
i0,8:0:5.0.9.6.0.0.6.6.0.6.50.9.880,04800¢¢0994

D0.8.0.6.00.00.00048000 8088800880464
D9.9.9.9.0.0.0.0.00.60.0666088900.¢4844
}.0.0.0.4.6.9.6,9.0.0.0.669.66.0063090¢1

b0.8.9.0.0.0.¢380940¢666000004
1.$.9.6.9.0.0.08.09090$0.6.8.9493
19.0.6.4.0.0.0:0.00.0.5.460680
¢
D9.4.0.0.0.8.88.06.¢6 49094
.9:9.0.9,6.0,0.4.0.0.9.4¢6.¢4

KXXNOOKAAAX
h8.9:6.4.4.8.0.9.4,¢.4
MUXKXAKKX

0.9.0.4.0.0.9.¢
XHHKX
XHH
X

XXXXX
KXAAXXX
}0.9.0.0.9.¢.¢.99
XX KXXAHAXXK
$:9.$.0.9.9.9.0.9.0.4
6494

09.$.0.8.4.¢.0.0.8.6.094
¢4

.8.9.0.6.0.0.4.9.6$064¢9004
P.0.6.6.0.0.906¢.40.¢ 460064

KUK KX XAXK KK KA KA XL XXX

. 0.9.0.8.0.0.0.8.0.8.9¢6609.0008464¢4
$9.8.0.8.9.0.0.00.866.040906660¢004
$9.0.0.0.90.9.0.98$6040090980004600¢

},0.0.0.8.0.6.08.0.0.6.6,06.¢80$6$900.¢0500
00.6.0.0,0.8.¢.9.6.80.0.060¢066609.6006906634
p0.6.00.0.6.0.9.00.0,¢.08060600680858¢0084¢4
$9.6.0.0.0.0.006.0.0.6.9.$.6088680906480808004¢4¢
p:9.0.9.09.090.0.00.8690.0.94000980480064640904¢
$0.0.0.0.9.9.0.8.00.609$660$00890809005809000¢46044
P290.0.8.9.00.0949006009.0.688060008486868890.4¢9.4

}9.0.0.0.9.9.8.0.6.90.0.0.0,0.000.06,0.6.080009.08089$6806.040904
00.0:0.0.0.9.9.0.0.80.0.0.0.6.00.908.060¢69¢94$¢008000900$040¢4
09.9.0.9.6.9.9.9.8.9.0.9.09.0.9.98.0.06.9¢.9.¢.$ 0060990800000

6040

$9.0,0:0:0.9,0.8.¢.09.9.60.0.9600.$00.056.¢00980008000000686888004
09.0.9.0.0.9.9.9.00.0.90.90.060
0888800 98.99690009600068006040¢¢9:

Chapter 1

Introduction
This chapter introduces the VAX 6000400 systein, its architecture and
system specifications. the location of components in the cabinet, and the
field-repiaceable unit list. Sections include:
¢

System Physical Description

°*

System Functional Description

VAX 6000400 Front View

VAX 6000400 Rear View

Field-Reolaceable Uint:

Introduction

1-1

1.1 System Physical Description
A typical VAX 6000400 system has a main cabinet with a TK
tape drive, a console terminal and printer, storage cabinets,
an accessories kit, and a set of documentation.

Figure 1-1: Typical VAX 6000-400 System
MAIN

STORAGE

CABINET

DEVICE

STORAGE

—

DEVKE

LATS
PRINTER

|
‘

¥
msb-0100-89

1-2

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Figure 1-1 shows a typical system.

The main cabinet houses a TK tape drive, the XMI card cage (which
contains the processors and memories), two VAXBI card cages, the
control panel switches, status indicators, and restart controls.
The TK tape drive in the main cabinet is used for installing operating
systems, software, and some diagnostics.

The storage cabinets have local storage and archiving capability.
The console terminal is used for console and system management
operations.

VAX 6000-400 documenta .a that ships with the system includes:
—

VAX 6000-400 Installation Guide

—

VAX 6000—400 Owner’s Manual

—

VAX 6000—400 Mini-Reference

See the Preface for a complete list of system documentation and
assocated documents.

introduction

1-3

Table 1-1:

VAX 6000-400 System Characteristics

Physical

cm (in)

Height

154 (60.5)

Width

78 (30.5)

Depth

76 (30.0)

Waight

318 kg (700 ba)

Environmental
5440 Btu/hr (5712 KJ/br)

Hest dissipation (max)

Operating temperature

Operating humidity

Altitude

TK not in use

10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)

TK in use

15° to 32°C (59° to 90°F)

TK npot in use

10% to 90% relative humidity

TK in use

20% to 80% relative humidity

Non-operational

2.4 to 9.1 km (8000 to 30,000 ft)

Opersting

0to 2.4 km (0 to 8000 ft)

Type

Pressurized, with sir moving de-

Air mover

Dual backward curved blowers

Air eource

Filtered ambient air

Cooling System

i-4

vice

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 1-1 (Cont.):

VAX 6000400 System Characteristics

Electrical
AC power consumption (max)

AC current (max)

Voltage input

1.6 kW

60 Hz

8 A(208V)

50 Hz

4A(16V), 45 A(380V)

60 Hz

3-phase 208 V RMS

50 Hz

3-phase 380/416 V RMS

Frequency tolerance

47-63 Hz

Surge current

60 A

introduction

1-8

1.2 System Functional Description
The VAX 6000-400 system supports multiprocessing with up
to six KAG4A processors. The system uses the XMI bus to
interconnect its KAG64A processors and its MS62A memory
modules. All /O devices connect to the VAXBI bus.

—
DHB32
——

j
ADAPTER (XBI)

—

TeK70 | | DEBNI

KDBSO|

|CIBCA | |DRB32

é)

oddd

VAX 6000-400 System Architecture

DISK

[ 4]

Figure 1-2:

TERMINALS

coum.sn

DEV'CE
mab-01bs £9

-6

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The XMI bus is the VAX 6000400 system bus; the VAXBI bus supports the

I/O subsystem. The XMI bus is a 64-bit system bus! that interconnects the

central processors, memory modules, and VAXBI I/O adapters.

The VAXBI and XMI buses share similar but incompatible connector and
module architecture. Both the VAXBI and XMI buses use the concept of
a node. A node is a single functional unit that consists of one or more
modules.
The XMI bus has three types of nodes: processor nodes (KA64A), memory
nodes (MS62A), and the XMIl-to-VAXBI I/O adapters (DWMBA).

A processor node, called a KA64A, is a single-board VAX processor. It
contains a central processor unit (CPU) chip, a floating-point processor,
primary and secondary cache, an EEPROM for system parameters, and
three custom VLSI components for interfacing to the XMI bus.
Processors communicate with main memory over the XMI bus. The system
supports multiprocessing of up to six processors. One processor becomes
the boot processor during power-up, and that boot processor handles all
system communication. The other processors become secondary processors
and are started by the primary processor (see Section 3.4).
A memory node is an MS62A. Memory is a global resource equally

accessible by all processors on the XMI bus. Each MS62A module has 32
Mbytes of memory, consisting of MOS 1-Mbit dynamic RAMs, ECC logic,

and control logic. Memory access is automatically interleaved between

moldu]es. An optional battery backup unit protects memory in case of power
failure.
An XMI-to-VAXBI adapter, called a DWMBA, is a two-board adapter that
transfers data between these two buses. The DWMBA/A module is installed
on the XMI bus; it is cabled to the DWMEA/B module on the VAXBI bus.
Every VAXBI bus on this system must have a DWMBA adapter. Therefore,
systems with two VAXBI channels have two DWMBA/A modules on the XMI
bus, and each VAXBI channel has a DWMBA/B module in its card cage.
System error messages and self-test results refer to the pair of DWMBA
modules as XBI.
The VAXBI bus, in turn, passes data between the system and the peripheral
devices.

1 The XMI bus has a 64-nanosecond bus cycle, with a mazimum throughput of 100 Mbytes
per second.

introduction

1-7

1.3 VAX 6000400 Front View
The TK tape drive and control panel are on the front of the
system cabinet, accessible with the doors closed. With the
front door open, field service representatives can access the
power regulators, VAXBI and XMI card cages, the cooling
gystem, and, if present, the battery backup unit and disks.

Figure 1-3:

VAX 6000400 System (Front View)

TK TAPE DRIVE

CONTROLPANEL

POWER REGULATORS

—-=)

VAXE!

XMI CARD CAGE

CARD CAGES

COOLING
SYSTEM

POWER AND

LOGIC BOX (H7206)

Hz SYSTEMS )
(50TRANSFORMER

BATTERY BACKUP

=1 UNIT (OPTIONAL)

C—3+ TOPTONAL)

- 0002-89

1-8

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

These components are visible from the inside front of the cabinet (see

Figure 1-3 for their location):
*

TK tape drive

Control panel

Power regulators

Two VAXBI card cages

XMI card cage

Cooling system

Power and logic box (H7206)

Battery backup unit and disks (optional)

Transformer (on 50 Hz systems only)

One of the two blowers is visible from the front of the cabinet.

Introduction

1-9

1.4 VAX 6000-400 Rear View
With the rear door open, field service representatives

can access the power sequencer module (XTC); the power
regulators; the 1/O bulkhead space behind the card cages;
Ethernet and console terminal connectors; cooling system;
power and logic box; battery backup unit and disks, if
present; and the AC power controller.

Figure 1-4:

VAX 6000400 System (Rear View)

XTC POWER
SEQUENCER MODULE
POWER
REGULATORS

~ | C—
VAXB!
CARD CAGES

XMI
CARD CAGE

ETHERNET AND

cooung |
SYSTEM

cgs:gl.gr TERMINAL

CONNECTORS
POWER AND

LOGIC BOX (H7206)

BATTERY BACKUP
UNIT (OPTIONAL)

DISKS
(OPTIONAL)

AC POWER

CONTROLLER
(H405)
mab-0180-88

1-10

VAX 6000-400 Oplions and Maintenance

These components are visible from the rear of the cabinet (see Figure 1-4):

Power sequencer module (XTC) located on the back of the TK tape drive
and control panel unit

Five field-replaceable power regulators
1/0 bulkhead space

The panel covering the XMI and VAXBI areas is the I/O bulkhead panel
and provides space for additional IO connections.
VAXEI! and XMI adapter bulkhead cables
Ethernet and console terminal connectors

Cooling system, with open grid over a blower
Power and logic box (H7206)

Battery backup unit and disks (optional)
AC power controller (H405)

Introduction

1-11

1.5 Field-Replaceable Units
Table 1-2 lists the major recommended spares and their part
numbers for the VAX 6000-400. SD indicates whether the
part is in the field service kit.

Table 1-2:

Field-Replaceable Units
Part Number

SDKit

Description

T2015

Y!?

CPU module (KAG4A)

T2017

Vector module (FV64A)

T1043

VAXBI adapter (DWMBA/B)

T2012

VAXBI adapter (DWMBA/A)

Memory:

T2014-B

32 Mbyte memory (MS62A)

VAXBI Card Cage:

H9400-AA

VAXBI card cage

XMI Card Cage:

70-24373-01

XMI 14-slot card cage

54-18172-01

XMI daughter card

54-18574-01

Control panel assembly

54-17243-01 or

XTC power sequencer

TK»0

Tape drive

12.19245-02

TOY clock battery

H7214

5 V regulator

H72156

5 V regulator

H7206

Power and logic box

L1405

60 Hz AC power controller

H405F

50 Hz AC power controller

H7231-N

250 W battery backup opticn

Processors:
Adapters:

Syetem Control
Asserbly:

20-29176-01

Powar Supply:

Battery Backup:

1The processor module is in » separste SD kit

cated parte except the processor moedule.

1-12

The common SD kit contsins all indi-

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 1-2 (Cont.):

Miscellaneous:

Field-Replaceable Units
P. rt Number

SDEKit

Description

12-11255-24

Air filter, front

12-11255-17

Air filter, rear

12.27848-01

Blower assembly

12-24701-06

H7206 fan

17-01844-01

Temperature sensor

12-25024-11

Airflow sensor

16-28393-01

Transformer

ntroduction

1-13

XXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXKXKXXxXXXKXXXXXXKXKXX
XXKXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
KX KK XK KA KK KA AN OO0 KX KR AN AKX XA KK XXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
R R KHHXAX KA XX AA XL KR FHKAKR KA KA KK XX XK KE KKK
HOX KR KHL XX KK IO XA AAXK AR UK XX KK KKK
Q000000 0000000600¢8080080800060060008
0
888800008¢8
00 80008000
00000000
0000
PRS00S0 009.0.0.009086.808058800
AXARXKKREK
XK
KX KA XK AKX
IO KA XXXE
KRAK
8000
88800
88000
00060
00
Pe
POO e
94,02
0.0.0.0.
8.6 £.64
FO101910:0:0:0.0.00.0.8.
XXX
XK
XK
XA
KOOI
KA
XX
KK
IOT
19001000 0.0010.0.0.8.6.0,8.0¢.8.8¢
8
1019.0.9.6.9.9.0,0.0.0.0,60.¢.9.6.90
p1910.0.0.0.0:0.8:0:9.6.9.0.6.9.0.%,94
1.0.8:0.0:.0.0.0..0.,9.0.0.0.9.0.9.4
.94
16:6.0.8.0.9.9.0.0.9.6.8
10/6.9.6,0.8:0.8.8.0,¢.9
10.9:0.9,0.9.¢.9,0.9.4
i9:9.¢.9.0.4,0.0.¢
KHHUHAK
HUXAA
HXX

XXX

XHXXXX

b s e b o

F0.0.00.09.0.0¢

IAXH
KX KRX
XX

0.8.0.9:4.6.4.9.0.9.9,0.¢
.9.6.9.9.0.4.6.9.0.9.9.0.02¢

XX XAXD
KAXXKAXKXXAX

I0.8.9.0.4.0.0.9.08.09.080.8089

PO 0000044 00.08.0.6.800 8¢
PO P00 0000000 80090.00800¢
10.0.0:9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.4.0.6.¢0.0.6.099.0.900¢

P0.0.0.000608060.88000800.80
PO
KKK
HAH KX AA XA XKD
XA
004
880808
400028
900000
EDSOIO0I0

AU A XK XA XX KK KA AKX
KOO KKK KH XK I
88890000098008
000
OO0 0 0000000080

N P00 000 PP 000 000808080000080800!
Petedetat sttt ted
N0 0700000 00
I XA XK KARRX KA KA KX KK UK KA AR UK KKKKHK
0O
KKK XN KK HH KK KK AR KK KKK KUAH XX XA NUKK KKK
AKX XKXXXKAXK KK KX KX AKX LX XX XA KK KAAAAX KA F KKK KKK
e S e 0000000000000 0.00.00006.808.00002000s00 00000
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXH

Chapter 2

Diagnostics
This chapter discusses the design of the VAX 6000-400 diagnostics, the
self-test, ROM-based diagnostic monitor program, ROM-based diagnostics
for VAXBI devices, and VAX diagnostic supervisor tests. Sections include:
Diagnostic Overview
Self-Test

ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor Program

RBD Monitor Control Characters
START Command
START Command Qualifiers
RBD Test Printout, Passing
RBD Test Printout, Failing
SUMMARY Command
Sample RBD Session
Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs

Running VAX/DS
Sample VAX/DS Session
VAX/DS Diagnostics

Diagnostics

2~1

2.1 Diagnostic Overview
The KAG4A system is tested with two types of diagnostics:
The ROM-based diagnostics
ROM-based and loadable.
(RBD) include self-tests, additional power-up tests, and
callable diagnostics (from the RBD monitor). The loadable
diagnostics run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor
(VAX/DS) in stand-alone mode or user mode (see Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1:

Dilagnostics Design

Soit-tost

ROM-Based

Additional Power-up Teet

Disgnostics
(REDe)

Oparator-invoiad Disgnostics

[_
Loadable

YAX Diagnostic Suparvisor, stand-alons (VAX/DS)
VAY Diagnoetic Supervisor, user mode (VAX/DS)

mab-0182-80

2-2

VAX 6000-400 Optione and Maintenance

Self-Tests

Each module on the XMI and VAXBI buses has its own self-test resident in
ROM, except for the DWMBA modules. At power-up, initialization, booting,
or system reset, each module runs its own self-test. The processor self-test
completes within 10 seconds. The memory test completes in less than 60
seconds.
Other Power-Up Tests
Following the modules’ self-tests, two additional tests are run and reported

in the self-test display: CPU/memory interaction tests and DWMBA tests.
All CPUs that have passed self-test run the CPU/memory interaction test.
The CPU/memory interaction test checks that the processors can access
memory. Memory also has a self-test that tests actual memory locations.
The CPU/memory interaction test is the second test for memory and serves
as a check on the memory's XMl interface and on some CPU logic that can
be tested only by accessing memory. Results are printed on the ETF line of
the self-test display. (See Chapter 6 of the VAX 6000400 Owner's Manual
for an explanation of self-test results.)
The DWMBA modules are tested by the boot processor before it quenes the
VAXBI options for the results of their self-tests. Results from both tests
are printed in the XBI hines on the self-test printout (see Example 2-1).
Cperator-Invoked ROM-Based Diagnostics

From the console prompt, you can enter RBD mode and run any of four
ROM-based diagnostics. Thesz four diagnostics are the KAG4A self-tests,
CPU/mem.ory interaction tests, DWMBA tests, and memory tests. In RBD
mode, you have the capability of running tests other than those in the
default suite, running multiple passes of tests, and receiving an error report
with information about any failing tests.

VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS)
From the console prompt, you can boot VAX/DS from the TK tape, or other

media and run stand-alone VAX/DS level 3 diagnostics (stand-alone mode).
From your operating system. run VAX/DS and run level 2R diagnostics
(user mode) Level 2 VAX'DS diagnostics may be run either in stand-alone
or user mode. See Table 2-8 for a listing of VAX/DS diagnostics.

Diagnostics

2-3

2.2 Self-Test
The se'f-test diagnostics reside in ROM on the processors
and on-board some other modules. These diagnostics check
each module at power-up, when the system is reset, and
during booting. Self-test results are written to the console
terminal, as shown in Example 2-1.

Example 2-1:

Sampie Seli-Test Resuits

$.1234%56789 £123456789 0123456789 01234567¢
F

TYP

BFD

ETF

BPD

xe1 p +@

ROMU

= V1.00

ROM1

EBEPROM =

1.00/1.00

>>>

The callouts in Ezxample 2-1 refer to Table 2-1.

2-4

.+
A4

= V1.00

VAX 6000~400 Options and Maintenance

NODE

STF

XBI

n
@

Iwv

128Mb

SN @

8501234567

Self-test 15 invoked and results are wnitten to the console under several
circumstances:

At power-up

When the control panel Restart button is pressed

During boot procedure

In console mode, with the systemwide INITIALIZE command

The first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line
indicates that the KA64A at node 1 is functioning during self-test.
The remainder of the printout is the self-test display Table 2-1 describes
the tests run during self-test.
The callouts in Table 2-1 refer to
Example 2-1 .
Table 2-1:

Self-Test Components

Tesat

Description

KAB4A

Each proceesor runs its own self-teet remdent 1n its own ROM A plus

@mgn (4+) on hne STF @ wmeans the processor passed. Each proces
sor also teste interachon with memory. A plus sign on hne ETF (2]
means the test passed

MS62A
DWMBA

Eech memory runs 1ts own self-test remdent 1n its sequencer. A plus

sigo on hne STF @ means the mermnory passed.

The XMI-to-VAXBi sdapter 18 tested by the boot processor.

A plue

@gn at the nght of the XBI hne © means both the DWMBA/A and
DWMBA/B passed.

VAXBI

Each VAXBI bue on the system 18 checked. and each VAXBI node runs

its own self-test. A plus s1gn 10 column 0 through F of the XBI hne (3]
means the VAXBI node paseed

The self-test printout 1n Example 2-1 reflects a specific configuration A

detailed explanation of self-test results 1s available by typing HELP SELF
at the console prompt. Self-test is also described in Chapter 6 of the VAX
6000-400 Cwner'’s Manual.

The tests run during self-test can be individually invoked in RBD mode
using the ROM-based diagnostics monitor program. Here you can examine
each test more closely and determine which test is faihng.

Diagnostics

2-5

2.3 ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor Program
The ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor program is accessed
through the console program. Type T/R at the console
prompt to enter RBD mode. RBD mode has three commands
with qualifiers and 2 set of control characters that run the
RBD teests.

Table 2-2:

RBD Monitor Commands
Function

Command
STIARTn

Starts RED n, where n 18 the number of the RBD program hsted in Te-

ble 2-3

SUIMMARY

Prints a summary report of the last RBD program run

QUIT

Emnts the RBD momtor snd returns control to the conaole program

Table 2-3: ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs
RBD

Program

Totals

Test

Default

(Power-Up) (Callable)

Default

Description

Rune CPU tests

‘

Runs ecalar and vector tents

Rune CPU/memory interaction tests

Runs ecalarvector CPU/memory interaction tesis

Runs DWMBA tests

Sizes and runs additional tests on
AR emory

2-6 VAX 6000—400 Oplions and Maintenance

‘

To enter the RBD monitor, at the console prompt type:
>>>

T/R

This

ie the

abbreviation

for TEST/RBD.

RBDn>

RBD prompt appsars

RBD mode,

the

where

processor

signifying entrance into
is

the

XMI

node

number

running the RBD monitor

program.

The RBD commands are explained here and in Sectiong 2.3.2 and 2.3.6.
Table 2-Z gives the commands, their abbreviations, and functions.
Four programs run from the ROM-based diagnostics (RBD) monitor
program. The programs are CPU self-test, CPU/memory interaction tests,
the DWMBA tests, and memory RBD tests. Each of these programs has
several tests, as shown in Table 2-3. The RBDs are designed for use by
Digital customer service personnel.

Each RBD has a default number of tests that run at power-up, and another
default number of tests that run when the program is called from the RBD
monitor (see Table 2-3). The CPU diagnostic (RBD 0) runs all its tests
in both modes.

The power-up default for the CPU/memory interaction

diagnostic (RBD 1) is 12 (scalar only—16 with the vector tests), and the
callable default is all tests. The DWMBA diagnostic (RBD 2) runs 20 of the
26 tests available as the default in both modes; tests 2, 3, 4, 10, 11, and
26 must be specifically invoked by qualifier in callable mode. RBD 3, the
Memory diagnostic, does not run on power-up. In callable mode, 7 of 12
tests run when invoked; tests 2 through 8 are defaults. To run tests other
than the default suite from the RBD monitor, issue a command such as the
following. which invokes all DWMBA tests:
RBDn>

ST2/T=1:2€

It is helpful to use the trace qualifier, /TR, with the RBD START command.
(See Section 2.3.3.)

This qualifier shows each individual test as it is

run. If a test fails, the program displays error messages. By default, the
RBD: continue testing after an error 18 encountered. Adding the halt-on-

erroir noahifier, /HE, causes the program to halt when the first error is
enccuntered Testing can be aborted at any time by typing CTRL/C.
To exat RBD mode, type QUIT at the RBD prompt. Your next prompt is
from console mode.

Diagnostics

2-7

2.3.1 RBD Monitor Control Characters
Several control characters are supported by the RBD
monitor program. These characters manage the program
process as shown in Table 2-4.

Tabie 2—4:

RBD Monltor Control Characters

Character

Environment

Function

Test running

Stops the execution of an RBD et and

[OEETE

RBD command hne

(CEaLa)

Test runnming

[CTRH)

At RBD prompt
Test runring

cutes cleanup code.

eze-

Use for deieting erroneous characters entered on the

eommand hine.

Resumes output to termunal that was suspended with

[ETR
%5}

Refreshes tre command line; ueeful when charac-

ters are dele .ed.

Suspends output to the terminal until

typed.
At RBD prompt
Test running
At RBD prompt

Drsres,ards previous input.

Stops the executinn of an RBD test and does not exe-

cute any cleanup code.

Exite

sole

mand

2-8

RBD

moniwwr

program.

same

VAX 8000-400 Options and Maintenance

program

effect as

and

the

enters

QUIT

con-

com-

When CTRL/C is entered from the console terminal that began execution
of the RBD test, the diagnostic stops execution, runs cleanup code, and
returns control to the RBD monitor program. This happens immediately
when running RBD 0, RBD 1, or RBD 2; there may be a wait of up to one

minute for a response when RBD 3 is running. If CTRL/C is typed at the
RBD monitor prompt, it has the same effect as CTRL/U.
When you use the DELETE key (or rubout key), characters being deleted
are preceded by a backslash ( \ ) and print as they are rubbed out. When
the next valid character is typed, it is preceded by a backslash ( \ ) to
delineate the deleted characters. You can use CTRL/R to refresh the line.
When the RBD monitor program receives a CTRL/U, the program
disregards all previous input typed and returns the RBD prompt. If a
test is running when CTRL/U is entered, CTRL/U is ignored.
When a CTRL/Y is received by the RBD monitor program from the console
terminal that began execution of the RBD test, the diagnostic stops
execution and returns control to the RBD monitor program. No cleanup
code 18 run, and the unit under test is left in an indeterminate state.
A CTRL/Y entered at the RBD monitor prompt has the same effect as
CTRL/U.

When the RBD monitor program receives a CTRL/Z, the program exits and
control is returned to the console program. The next prompt is the console
prompt. CTRL/Z has the same effect as the QUIT command. If CTRL/Z
is entered while an RBD test is running, CTRL/Z has the same effect as
CTRL/C: it halts the test and executes cleanup code.

Diagnostics

-9

2.3.2 START Command
The RBD monitor START command invokes a gpecific RBD
program. It takes an argument indicating the RBD program
to be run, and can take any of 13 gualifiers.
Example 2-2:

START Command

>>> T/R

RBD3>

! RBD monitor prompt,

where 3 is the bexa-

decimal

of the processor

that

RBL3> ST2/TR E

RBD3> ST1/HE/IE/BE

Command to enter RBD monitor program.

node number

is currently receiving your input.

! Runs the defgult XBI tests,

testing the

DWMBA at

Teat

are

XMI node number E.

results

written to the console terminal.

! Runs the CPU/memory interaction RBD,
!

the

firet

error encountered,

error

output,

first

error

halting

inhibiting

ringing the bell when the
encountered.

The START command syntax is:
STn{/qualifier]

[parameter]

where:

nis the RBD to be run (see Table 2-3).

[/qualifier] is one of those listed in Section 2.3.3.

[parameter] is a program-specific value used in RBD 2 or RBD 3. (For
the meaning of this parameter in RBD 2, see Section 6.4, and in RBD
3, see Section 5.10.)

2-10

VAX 8000400 Options and Maintenance

2.3.3 START Command Qualifiers
The START command is the primary RBD program
command. Its qualifiers act as switches, allowing you to
control the output of the tests—to run portions of a test, to
run nondefault tesis, and to loop on tests.

Tabie 2-5:

START Command Quallifiers

Qualifier

Pefault

Function

/BE

Dhsabled

Bell sounds when an error 18 encountered

Dasabled

Destructive test confirmation

/DS

Disabled

Disable status reports

Dheabled

Halt on the test that incurs a hard error

/HS

Dsabled

Halt on the test that incurs a soft error

Deabled

Inhibit all error output

Disabled

Inhibit summary reports

/LE

Dsabled

Loop on the test that incurs a hard error

Disabled

Loop on the test that incurs a soft error

P=n

Enabled

Make n paszses of the test or tests indicated

Daabled

Quick venfy mode

T=n/:m]

Enabled

Disabled

fT=n runs test n; T=n-m runs a range of tests from n

through m

Print & trace of test numbers, as they run

NOTE: A qualifier is valid only for the command with which it is issued.
Qual:ifiers do not remain in effect for the scssion once they are issued.

See Example 2-2 for examples and a description of the START command
syntax.

With /BE, the RBD monitor program rings the bell on the console terminal

whenever an error is encountered. This is useful when error printout is
inhibited and a loop is being performed on an intermittent error (/LE).

/C enables execution of destructive tests. See Example 2-7 and Section 5.10
for information on the destructive tests.

Diagnostics

2-11

/DS disables printout of the diagnostics test results. The summary report
is run, unless it 18 apecifically disabled.
/HE halts on hard error and stops execution of tests as soon as the first
hard error is encountered. (In this context, a hard error is defined as a
recoverable, repeatable error, for example, a ROM checksum error. This
differs from a fatal error, which is an unrecoverable fault, for example,
an unexpected interrupt or exception. A fatal error is always cause for
program abortion, regardless of the state of the /HE or /LE qualifier.) The
test number is printed, and a summary indicating failure of the RBD is
printed to the console terminal. Also the RBD monitor prompt is returned.
Continue on error is the default condition, so if you want a halt on error,
you must specifically invoke it in your command line.
/HS halts on soft error and siops execution of tests as soon as the first soft
error 18 encountered. (In this context, a soft error is defined as a recoverable
error that goes away after retry, for example, a corrected read data memory
error.) The test number is printed, and a summary indicating failure of the
RBD 1s printed to the console terminal. Also the RBD monitor prompt is
returned. Continue on soft error is the default condition, 80 if you want to
halt on soft error, you must specifically invoke it in your command line.
/1E inhikits all error output, suppressing printing of RBD results. This
qualifier is used primarily for module repair, in conjunction with the /LE
or /LS qualifier. Errors are counted even when the printing is disabled.
/1S suppresses printout of RBD summary after the end ¢/ the last pass
performed by the RBD.
/LE loops on the test where the first hard error is detected. Even if the
error is intermittent, looping continues on the test indicated To terminate
/LE, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one of these control
characters, a summary report is printed. A fatal error causes the program
to abort, regardless of the state of this qualifier.
/LS loops on the test where the first soft error is detected. Even if the
error is intermittent, looping continues on the test indicated. To terminate
/.5, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one of these control
characters, a summary report is printed.

/P=n runs n number of passes of the RBD test invoked, where n is a decimal
number. If n is 0, all selected tests run for an infinite number of passes.
If the /P qualifier is not used, the program defaults to one pass of the test
invoked. When used with the /T=nm qualifier, you run a range of tests.
To terminate /P=n, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one
of these control characters, a summary reports prints out and the RBD
monitor prompt returns.

2-12

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

/QV selects the quick venfy version of any selected test that supports this
mode.
=n[:m] selects individual tests (/T=n) or a range of tests (/T=n:m) where
n and m are decimal numbers. For example, to run tests T0005 through
T0008, use /T=5:8. If no /T qualifier is used, the diagnostic runs its default
suite of tests.

/TR prints each test number as it is completed. This qualifier allows you to
trace the progress of the diagnostic as it runs. Without the /TR qualifier,
just the summary line is printed.
Two parameter fields can be appended to the START command string to
control aspects of the diagnostic that are ~ .. covered by the qualifiers. The

parameter(s) must be appended after any qualifiers specified and separated
from the qualifiers, and from each other if both are entered, by a spa-2. The
format of the parameter field 1s one to 10 hexadecimal characters. The use
of a parameter field is implementation specific and is optional.

Diagnostics

2-13

2.3.4 RBD Test Printout, Passing
The RBD printout results are different when the RBD tests
pass and when they fail. Example 2-3 shows a8 passing
prinioui, aind Example 2-4 is 2 sample failure printout.
Exampie 2-3:
>>»>

RBD Tesi Printout, Passing

T/R

RBD3>

RBD3> ST2/TR E

. x81_tEsTED
,

TOCC1

TOOCS

, TO01é6

TGC1?

Command to enter RBD monitor program at

conscle

prompt.

! RBD monitor prompt,

where 3 is the hexa-

decimal

node

that

currently receiving your

Runs the XBI self-test,

written

XMI

node
to

number

number
the

console

the processor

input.

testing the DWMBA

Tast

results

terminal:

1.008
TOGOE

TOC18

TOOOT

TOO1®

TO0008

TO020

TO0009

TO0O021

T0Ol2

TCO022

TOO13

TOOR23

7T0014

TO024

TOOL1S

TOOZSG;

pO
36
8082@
10
; 00000000 00O0OCOOC 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000‘)
RBD3> QU‘;

' RBD prompt returns; test ran successfully.
!

Exit

RBD

proyram.

The callouts in Example 2-3 are explzined below.

@ This entry designates which test is being run. Here it is the XBI_TEST,
the self-test for the DWMBA.

XRP_ST indicates RBD C, the CPU tests
CPUMEM indicates RBD 1, the CPU/memory interaction tests
XBI_TEST indicates RBD 2, the DWMBA tests
XMA_RBD indicates RBD 3, the Memory tests

[his feld lists the revision number of the RBD program.

@ These TOOnn fields appear only with the /TR qualifier; each entry

corresponds to a test being run and prints out as the test starts runsing.
In a passing RBD, the final TOOnn number corresponds to the last test
run.

2-14

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

@e
© O

Note that T0002 through T0004 and T0010, T0011, and T0026 are not
executed These tests are not part of the default selection and must be
individually invoked by qualifier. For a List of the tests for each RBD
and the definition of the tests, see the chapter for each module in this
manual.
This field indicates wirether the RBD passed or failed; P for passed, F
for failed.
This field is the XMI node number of the boot processor executing the
RBD. It matches the number in your RBD prompt.

Thus field is always 8082—the device type of the boot processor.

This field displays the total number of passes (in decimal) executed by
the RBD. The default number of passes is 1. If you use the START
command with the qualifier /P=5, for example, then this field will show

5, indicating 5 passes were completed.

This line contains the stmmary of the RBD failures. In a successful
RBD run, the line will contain all zeros as shown here. Currently
only the second and third fields are used. The second field contains the
number of hard errors detected during the run. The third field contains
the number of soft errors detected during the run.
The console prompt is usually returned in response to the RBD QUIT
command, as shown in this example. However, when some tests are
run, the response to QUIT is a system reset. Self-test is then run, and
the self-test results are printed. The tests that cause a system reset
are: Test 1 of RBD 1; Tests 2, 3, 4, 10, and 11 of RBD 2; and Tests 4
and 8 of RBD 3.

Diagnostics

2-15

2.3.5 RBD Test Printout, Falling
The RBD printout results are different when the RBD passes
gnd when it fails. Example 2-4 is a sample failure printout,
and Example 2-3 shows a passing printout.

Example 2-4:
>>>

RBD Test Printout, Falling

T/R

Tommand to enter RBD moniter program at
console prompt.

RBD monitor prompt, where 2 is the hexadecimal node number of the processcr
O

RBD2>

RBD2> STO/TR

;

MRE_ST

;

TOOO1

, T0011
;
.

TOO19

, T0029
;

that

currently

Execute RBD 0

receiving your

(CPU tast)

input.

and trace results.

1.00

TOO02

TOU.2

TOOC3

<T0013

<TODD4

TO0014

TOOOS

TOO1S5

TOOO6

TO00l6

TOOO7

TCOLlY

TOOOB

TOOlBo

TOO009

TOO1O

1 2]
20
80820}
18
w® rexs208
w@®
10018®
100 ananraan® rearnann@® 00002000 00000anc® 200645170 0 1P
T0020

TOO30

TO021

7T0031
2

TO022

TO0023

TO032 TOO33
8082

T0024

TO0034

T0025

TO035

TO0026

TOO3é

T0027

TOO37®

T0028

1®

; 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00000000 0O0G0000 00000000
RBD2>
RBDZ>
>>

! RBD prompt
QUIT

returns;:

BExit

Conscle prompt

test completed.

RBD program.
reappears.

The callouts in Example 2-4 are explained below. (See also Example 2-3
for explanation of other fields of the printout.)

These TOOnn fields appear only with the /TR qualifier; each entry
corresponds to a test being run. The entry prints out as the test starts
running. This TOOnn number is the number of the failing test and is
followed by a failure report. In this example, test 18 failed. The /HE

®
6

qualifier was not used, 8o testing continues.

F indicates failure of the previous test listed, test 18.

This field is the XMI nede number of the boot processor executing the
RBD. It maiches the number in your RBD prompt.

2-16

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

@ 0

This field i1s always 8082—the device type of the boot processor.
Thas field displays the total number of passes (in decimal) executed by

The class of error is displayed here. HE indicates that the error was
a hard error SE means the error was a soft eivor, and FE indicates a
fatal error. (See Section 2.3.3 for a definition of these errors.)

This field describes the failing logic.
failing logic.

86680600

This field is the unit number used in memory and DWMBA tests.

The expected data is listed here.
expected.

AAAAAAAA is the data test 18

The received data 1s lListed here.
received.

ABAAAAAA is the data test 18

80666

the RBD. The default number of passes is 1.

This field shows anv unexpected in'errupt vectors.

Here, the processor chip is the

This field lists the number of the test that failed; test 18 failed here.

This 15 a two-digit (decimal) generic error code.

This is the address in memory where the referenced error is found.
This is the address of the failing PC at the time of error.

This is the error number within the failing test. In this example, the
failure was detected at the first possible failure point in T0018. This is

e 6

a deaimal field.

This final T0O0Onn number corresponds to the last test run.

This entire line 1s the summary line. and a repeat of the failure
summary It hsts the pass/fail code (P or F), the node number and
device {vpe number of the boot processor executing the RBD, and the
number of passes of the RBD.

This is the number of hard errors detected.

Diagnostics

2-17

2.3.6 SUMMARY Command
The RBD monitor SUMMARY command displays a summary
of the last diagnoetic run.
Example 2-5:

SUMMARY Command

>»> T/R

RBD1> STO0/IE/18/P=100

! Execute RBD 0

XRP_ST

XRP_S7

(CPU test),

inhibiting

error outputs and summary report.

Request

1.00

RBD1> S0
;

Command to enter RBD monitor program

& summary.

1.00

1000
1® 80820
1
; 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000009
RBD1>

2-18

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The callouts in Example 2-5 are explained below.

@ This field indicates whether the RBD passed or failed; P for passed, F
for failed.

@ This field is the XMI node number of the boot processor executing
the RBD. It will match the number in your RBD prompt, which also
indicates the node number of your boot processor.

® Thas field is the device type number of the boot processor executing the
® ©

RBD.

This field displays the total number of passes executed by the RBD.

This line contains the summary of the RBD failures. Presently only the
second and third fields are used. The second field contains the number
of hard errors detected during the run. The third field contains the
number of soft errors detected during the run.

Diagnostics

2-19

2.3.7 Sample RBD Session
Ezamples 2-8 and 2-7 show s sample RBD session.

Example 2-6:
>>>»

Sample RBD Sesslon, Part 1 of 2

T/R"

Reo1> sT0/TRE
1.00

;XRP_ST

; T0001
; TO0il
;
;

TO0OO2
T0012

T0021
T0031

TOOO3
TO013

TO022
T0032

TOCR23
TO033

TOOO4
TOO14

TO024
TO034

TOOOS
TOO1S5

TOOO6
TOO16

TOO2S5
T0035

TO026
TO036

T0007?
TOO1?

7T0027
7T0037

TOOO8
TOOl8

TOO28

TO0O09
TOO19
T0029

TOOLO
TOO20
TOO30

1
8082
1
P
;
;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000

RBC1> 871/TR/HE®

1.00

; CPUMEM
;

TO001

TO002

TOO003

TOCi1

T0012

TOO013

TOOO4

TOOOS

TOOO6

TODOO?

TOODB

TOOO9

1
8082
1
P
H
;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000Q0000 00000000 00000000

rep1> s12 5O
; XBI_TEST

;
;
H

1.00

8082

No_Unit

TO00O

00 00000000 00000000 00000000 000OO000 20070SE7 01

1
8082
1l
F
:
;00000000 00000001 000GOOO0 00000000 00000000 Q0000000 00000000

RBL1>

ST2/TR/Te2:4/p=3 E®

1.00

XBI_TEST
;

TOO0Z

TOOO3

<TOOO4

TO002

TOGO3

TOOO4

T0002

TOO03

TOOO4

3
8082
1
»
H
;00206000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000

2-20

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

TOO1O

Enter RBD mode from console mode. The RBD prompt appears and
indicates you are operating from the boot processor at node 1.

Rur RBD 0 and trace the tests.
successfully.

Run RBD 1, trace it and halt on the first error found. All CPU/memory
interaction RBD tests run and pass.

Run RBD 2, testing the DWMBA at XMI node 5. The value NO_UNIT
on the third line of output indicates that the node value of node 5 is not
correct; no DWMBA was found at this node.

The CPU test runs all 37 tests

Run RBD 2, testing the DWMBA at XMI node E; trace the tests as
they run, and run tests 2 through 4 of RBD 2; make 3 passes over
these selected tests.

Note that the TOOnn line lists each of the three tests three times, since
the /P=3 called for 3 passes of the tests. And the final parameter in the
summary line is a 3, indicating that 3 passes completed.

Diagnostics

2-21

Sample RBD Session, Part 2 of 2

Example 2-7:

RBD1> 873/TR/1=10
RBD1> $T3/TR/T=1

RED1> . .3/TR/T=1 /c@®
1.00

; XMA_RBD
70001

;

8082

;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000

re01> QU
[self-test results may be displayed here]

>>> seT cpu 20
>>>

T/R

rep2> s70/TR®

;XRP_ST

1.00

;

TO001L

TO002

<TOOO3

<T0004

TO005

TOO006

TOOO7

;

T0031

T0032

TO033

T0034

T0035

T0036

T0037

; TO011
; T0021

TO012
TO0022

TOO013
TO023

TO0014
1TO024

TOO1S5
TOO02S

TOO016é
TC026

TOOC17?
7T0027

TOO08

<TOOlE
TO028

'TOO09

<TOO1l9
T0029

1
8082
2
P
;
;000000060 00000000 00000000 00600000 000000000 00000000 00000000

2-22

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

TOO1O

<TOO020
7TOO30

Run RBD 3, trace it, and run only test 1 of this RBD. This test is one of
the memory tests that is not part of the default suite of tests. This test
corrupts memory. You must add a /C qualifier to the START command,
to indicate that you do indeed intend to run this destructive test.
The /C qualifier was not given in this example. The command line is
echoed, waiting for /C to be typed.

6
©

At this point you can press Return to return to the command prompt
‘RBD1>), or you can type the /C qualifier followed by Return.

Run RBD 3, trace the tests as they run, run only test 1, and /C allows
the test to run. In this example, the test completed with no errors.
Exit from RBD mode. Enter console mode.

Make the next processor the primary processor so that RBD 0 can be

run on it.

Run RBD 0 and trace the tests.
successfully.

The CPU test runs all 37 tests

Diagnostics

2-23

2.3.8 Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices
Some VAXBI devices can be tested from the console terminal
with their on-board ROM-based diagnostics. The Z console
command is used to send commands to these VAXBI nodes.
Example 2-8:

VAXBI RBD Sesslon

>>> SHOW CONFIGURATION®
Type

Rev

1+
A+

KA64A

(8082)

0007

MS62R

(4001)

0002

D+

DWMBA/A

(2001)

0002

E+

DWMBA/A

(2001)

0002

XBI

1+
$+

DWMBA/B

(21C7)

0007

DMB32

{0109)

210B

€+

DEBNI

(0118)

0100

XBI

DWMBAR/B

(2107)

0007

FKDBS0O

(010E)

COFiC

S+

TBK70

(410B)

0307

>>»>

Z/BI:6

733

connection

succesafully started

t/r®
repe> st 0/1RO
iDebni_ST

;

T01

1.02

7T02

;

T03

TO4

;00000000

00CO0000

;

FFFFy»~vx

PUDR:

TOS

T06

TO7?

7T08

0118 0000002C
00000000

00000000

00CO0000

00000000

rReD6> QuItd
“P
731

connection

terminated by

“P

>>> 2/81:5 @
733

connection

successfully started

t/r

RBDS> ST 0/TR

;T1035_St

1.00

Example 2-8 Cont'd. on next page

2-24

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

00000000

Example 2-8 (Cont.):
;

TO1

TO02

T03

;

T15

T16

T17

4
;00000000
PUDR:

RBDS>

TO4
6

VAXBI RBD Session
TO5

TO06

Y07

TOS

TOY

TIO

T11

Ti2

T13

q410B 00000001

GO000000 00000000 00000000

00000000

00000000 00000000

S5FF43FDF

QUIT

“P
7?31

Z connection terminated by ~p

>>>

The callouts in Example 2-8 are explained below.
The SHOW CONFIGURATION console command shows that this
system includes a DEBNI at node 6 of the VAXBI attached at XMI
node D, and a TBK70 at node 5 of the VAXBI attached at XMI node
E. (See VAX 6000—400 Owner’s Manual for more information on the
SHOW CONFIGURATION command.)
The Z command is typed at the conscle prompt. A connection is
established to node 6 (/B1:6) of the VAXBI connected at XMI node D

(D). The console returns a message confirming that the connection has
been made.

After the console message is returned in @, no prompt i printed.

Typing t/r invokes the RBD monitor on the VAXBI sadapter being teated
and returns the RBD monitor prompt. Note that the "6” in the RBD
prompt refers to the VAXBI node.
The START command for VAXBI RBDs requires e space before the 0.
When run with the /TR qualifier, test traces are printed. The last line of
the summary report indicates the contents of the Power-Up Diagnostic

interpret the contents reperted.

® The QUIT command exits the RBD monitor. The Z connection remains
until CTRL/P is entered.

® Steps ® through © are repeated to run the RBD of the TBK70 at node
5 of the VAXBI attached at XMI node E.

Diagnostics

2-25

2.4 VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs
The VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) is a monitor that
controls operation of a diagnostic program. You can use
VAX/DS in one of two modes: stand-alone mode (exclusive

use of the system) or user mode (under the VMS operating
system).

Table 2-6:

VAX Diagnostic Program Levels

Level

Type of Test

Run-Time Environment

System exercisers

Runs under the VMS operating sys-

Function tests of peripheral devices

Exercisers and function tests of
peripheral devices and processors

Runs under VAX/DS in uoer mode and
stand-alone mode

Function tests and logic tests of
peripheral devices end processors

Runs under VAX/DS in stand-alone
mode

Table 2-7:

tem without VAX/DS

Rune under the VMS operating &ys-

tem with VAX/DS

VAX/DS Documentation

Document

Order Number

VAX Dragnostic Supervisor User’s Guude

AA-FKS6A-TE

VAX Dwagnostic Software Handbook

AA-F152A-TE

VAX Druagnostic Design Guide

AA-FK67A-TE

VAX Systems Hardware }Handbook

EB--31692-46

2-26

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintena’ce

The VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) can be run in interactive mode.
You type commands in response to the VAX/DS program prompt:
Ds>

VAX/DS lets you load diagnostic programs into system memory, select
devices to be tested, and run the programs.
The VAX/DS command
language also lets you control the execution of diagnostic programs; you
can specify which tests or sections of a program should run, and how many
passes it should run. You can also show the current state of parameters
that affect the operation of diagnostic programs. The programs report their
results through VAX/DS to the terminal.
VAX/DS supports three types of diagnostic programs:
¢

Logic tests

Test a specific section of a device's logic circuitry. Logic tests provide the
greatest degree of detail in determining the location of faulty haraware.
®*

Function tests
Test the functions of the device. For example, a function test for a disk
drive would test the drive’s reading and writing capabilities. Function
tests can detect the location of faulty hardware, although the results
may be less exact than those of a logic test.

Exercisers
Test entire systems or subsystems and verify that a system can function
properly over a period of time. Exercisers can detect both hardware
faults resulting from the simultaneous use of a system’s numerous

devices and intermittent faults occurring only once or twice over a long
period of time.

Table 2-8 lists the VAX/DS programs available for the VAX 6000400
system. Each program has a HELP file available. To access the help files
for any diagnostic, at the VAX/DS prompt, type:
DsS>

HELP

[VAX/DS diagnostic program name)

Diagnostics

2-27

2.4.1 Running VAX/DS
You can use VAX/DS in one of two modes: stand-alone mode
(exclusive use of the system) or user mode (under VMS).
Example 2-9:

Running Stand-Aione YVAX/DS

>>> BOOT/R5:10 CSAl

! Enter BOLT command designating the
! TK tape drive as input device; /R5:10

[solf-test
Loading aystem software.

i8 the boot

VAX/DS program.

flag indicating the

repulta print]

VAX DIAGNOSTIC

SOFTWARE

PROPERTY OF

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
e+ *CONFIDENTIAL AND

PROPRIETARY***

Use Authorized Only Pursuant to & Valid Right-to-Use License

Copyraight,

Digital Equipment Corporation,

DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR.
Ds>

ZZ~ERSAA-11.XX-NNN
31-0EC-1989 12:01:45
! System boots VAX/DS and displayes banner.
!

DS> *P
?02 External halt

1989.

(CTRL/P,

Run VAX/DS

level

2 programs.

! Enter CTRL/P to exit VAX/DS
break, or external halt)

= 0002705¢

PSL = 00000200
KSP
>>>

2-28

0004D210
!

Conscle prompt

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

returna.

Example 2-10:

Running VAX/DS in User Mode

$ RUN ERSAA

the VAX/DS program.

[VAX/DS

banner

L3>

prints,

the

operating

system prompt,

run

in example above)

VAX/DS

Run VAX/DS

prompt

appears.

Ds> EXIT

Type EXIT

Operating system prompt

lsvel

programas.

to exit VAX/DS

returns.

Table 2—6 describes the levels of VAX/DS programs. Check Table 2-8 for
the programs you wish to run, and determine if you will run VAX/DS in
stand-alone or user mode.
To run VAX/DS in stand-ai.... mode, insert a TK tape containing the VAX

6000—400 VAX/DS program intu the TK tape drive on the system.! At the
console prompt, boot VAX/DS from the TK tape using the /R5:10 qualifier:
>>>

BOOT

/R5:10

CSAl

where CSAl is the device name for the TK tape drive, and /R5:10 is the boot
flag designating the VAX/DS program (see Example 2-9). To run VAX/DS
in user mode under VMS, you use the RUN command under your operating
system (see Example 2-10).
In both stand-alone and user mode, VAX/DS functions the same way.
Typically a program running in user mode provides less detailed resulis
than one running in stand-alone mode. For more information on VAX/DS,
see the documents listed in Table 2-7.

! The VAX 6000400 Console TK50 tape (part rumber AQ-FK87A-ME) ehips with every
system and contains VAX/DS and the sutosizer. Digital customer service representatives

und hcensed self-maintenance customers may use the VAX 6000—400 COMPL DIAG
SET TKS50 tape (part number AQ-PBPRA-DE) that containse VAX/DS, the autosizer,
and a complete set of diagnostics. The nonbootable VAX 6000-400 COMPL DIAG SET
16MT9 tape (part nurmber BB-PBPSA-DE) is also available to customer service and selfmaintenance customers for use on a TUB1 tape drive.

Diagnostics

2-29

2.4.2 Sample VAX/DS Session
When you run the VAX/DS programs, run the system
autosizer program EVSBA first. This program, which takes

several minutes to execute, will save you time as you proceed
with other tests. Certain conditions cause the generation of
an unexpected trap or interrupt. Use the method shown to
avoid these conditions.

Example 2-11:

Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 1 of 3

>>> SET BOOT DIAG

/XMI:E/BI:S$/R5:10

DURO

>>> BooT p1acld
[self-test

results print]

Loading system software.
VAX DIAGNOSTIC

PROPERTY

SOFTWARE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
***CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY®**

Use Authorized Only Pursuant tc a Valid Right-to-Use License
Copyright,

Digital Equipment Corporation,

1989.

X6.6,

revision 6.6,

DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR. 22-DS> RUN EVSBA!Q
.

Program:
at

End

time

2-30

EVSBRA - AUTOSIZER

level 3

17:52:20.21.
of

run,

errors detected,

is 31-DEC-1989

pass

count

1is

17:55:07.02

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

3 tests,

© The SET BOOT command stores a nickname for a set of parameters to
the BOOT command. (The lower key switch on the control panel must
be set to Update when this command is issued.) This BOOT command
loads VAX/DS from disk. Alternatively, you can use the command
BOOT/R5:10 CSA1, which loads VAX/DS (/R5:10) as stand-alone from
the system TK tape drive (CSA1). For more information on the BOOT
and SET BOOT commands, see the VAX 6000400 Owner’s Manual.

@ The off-line autosizer program EVSBA identifies hardware on your
system and builds a database for the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor.
The autosizer eliminates the need for you to type in the name and
characteristics of the hardware you intend to test under VAX/DS with
level 3 diagnostic programs.

Diagnostics

2-31

Example 2-12:

Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 2 of 3

ps> suow pev®
_DWMBAl
BI Node
_DUA
TDJA2)
_KAO
_Kal
_DWMBAC
BI Node
_TXA

DEBNI

_DUA2

RA82

_DUR

7C$00000

_DUA61

PRA82

_DUA

7C500000

MUA

TBK70

_DWMBAl 7C00C000

TMUAD

XMI node ¢

TK70

_MUR

(1,2,3,4,B,C,D,E)

BI Node Number

(HEX)=00000004
(X)

XMI node ¢

7C580000

(1,2,3,4,B,C,D,E)

SET

(HEX)=00000005 (X)
(HEX)e00000006
(X)

BI Node Number

(HEX)=00000006
(X)

TRACE

DS> SET EVENT 2
DS>

RUN ERKMP
Program:

ERKMP

KA64A MP

Exerciser,

revision

Testing:

_KAOD _Kal
Booting Secondary Processor

Test
Test

Memory Interlock Test
Interprocesscor Interrupt

Test

Write Error

Tegt

Cache

Test

XMI Bue 2.bitration Test

Test

XMI Bus Arbitration Cellision Test

Test

XMI Lockout

Test

Cache

Teat

XMI Suppress Assertion Test

Test

10:

Multiprocessor Exerciser

1.0,

16:11:41.25.

BEnd of
time

run,

Test

Coherency Test

errors detected,

pass

count

is 1,

is 31-DEC-1989 18:16:24.49

702 External halt

(CTRL/P,

break,

or external halt)

= 00027056

PSL =

(00000200

KSP

0004D210

2-32

$02

Invalidate Teat

ps> ~p®
PC

Interrupt

«0000000D(X)

BI Node Wumber
BI Node Number

ps> serect aLdd
DS>

=0000000E
(X)

XMI Node ID=00000001
(X)
XMI Node ID=00000002(X)

_DWMBAC 7R00C000

ETAO

DWMBA
HUB
61F00000
Number (HEX)=00000001(X)
KDB50
_DWMBAl 7C008000
7C500000
_DUA
RAG0
KA64A
HUB
61880000
KA64A
RUB
61900000
DWMBA
HUB
61R80000
Nunmber (HEX)=00000001(X)
DMB32
_DWMBAO 7TAO0AO0C

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

tests,

® You can use the autosizer to print a list of system hardware by running

the program EVSBA under VAX/DS and typing the VAX/DS command

SHOW DEVICE/BRIEF. The command lists system devices, similar to
the SHOW CONFIGURATION command in console mode.

O Preparing to run a diagnostic, SELECT ALL selects all devices listed in
®. SET TRACE enables printing of test numbers and names when the
diagnostic runs. If you run another diagnostic after this one and you
want the tests traced, you will need to issue the SET TRACE command
again. The SET EVENT 2 command disables some informational
messages printed by this diagnostic.

© An external halt causes VAX/DS to print the contents of the program
counter, the processor status longword, and the stack pointer. Since
VAX/DS was called from console mode, the console prompt is returned.
In a VAX 6000400 system an external halt can, in some cases, cause

an unexy c°ted trap or interrupt through SCB vector 60 The remainder
of this e ..nple shows how to avoid this condition by using the CLEAR
EXCEPTIUN rommand and what happens if the condition is not cleared
by the consc .

Diagnostics

2-33

Example 2-13:

Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 3 of 3

>>> CLEAR ExcEPTIONGD
= 00000041
XBER
XFADR = 61880008
RCSR

01240001

>>> SHOW CONFIGURATIONG
1+
3+

KAG64A

TYype

(8082)

Rev
0007

KA64A

(8082)

0007

A+

MS62A

(4001)

0002

B+

MS62K

(4001)

0002

D+

DWMBA/A

E+

DWMBA/A

(2001)
(2001)

0002
0002

XBI

DWMBA/B

(2107)

0007

2+
5+

CIBCA
DMB32

(0108)
(0109)

210B

DEBNI

(0118)

0100

XBI

41c1

DWMBA/B

(2107)

0007

4+
6+

KDBSO
TBK70

(D10E)
(410B)

OF1C
0307

>>> CLEAR ExcEPTIOND
YBER
= B001B041
XFADR = 61900000
RCSR
= 012¢0011
»»>

CONTINUVE

ps>

702

External
PC

>>>

halt

0002704R

PSL =

00000204

KSP

0004D210

break,

external balt)

SHOW CONFIGURATION

>>>

CONTINUE

?7?

Unexpected

User

trap

error:

PSL at
DS8>

(CTRL/P,

interrupt

thru SCB vecter

error:

00000004 (X)

rsturn PC:

none

;

CUReKERNEL, PRVeKERNEL, IPLw00 (X), 2

found!

CONTINUE
Continuing

from

0002704A

DS>

2-34

0060

0002704A
(X)

VAX 6000~400 Options and Maintenance

The CLEAR EXCEPTION command prints the contents of three
registers (XBER, XFADR, and RCSR) and then clears their error bits,
if set. No error bits have been set at this point.

@ The SHOW CONFIGURATION command attempts to examine unused
address space, creating errors.

These error bits are then

cleared by the command. When VAX/DS is halted as it was in @
and a command is issued that causes errors, as in @, the CLEAR
EXCEPTION command must be issued before issuing the CONTINUE
command to resume the VAX/DS session.

VAX/DS is halted and SHOW CONFIGURATION is issued, again
creating errors. (The response to SHOW CONFIGURATION is the

same as shown in @.) This time the CONTINUE command ie issued

without first issuing CLEAR EXCEPTION. Since error bits were not
cleared, VAX/DS attempts to perform its error recovery procedures, and
an interrupt occurs. This is normzl behavior for a VAX 6000—400 system
in these circumstances.

Diagnostics

2-35

2.4.3 VAX/DS Diagnostics
Table 2-8 lists the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor tests available

for the VAX 6000-400 system.

Table 2-8:
Diagnostic

VAX Dlagnostic Supervisor Programs
Level

ERSAA!

Diagnostic Title
VAX 6000-400 Diagnost: Supervisor

EVSBA

VAX Stand-Alone Autogizer

EVSBB

VAX Dhagnostic Online Autosizer
KAG64A-Specific Diagnostics

ERKAX!?

Menual Tests (5-6 min?)

ERKMP!

Multiprocessor Exerciser
(2 oun—quick)
(4 min—default)

FV64A-Specific D,

EVKAG

ostics

VAX Vector Instruction Exeraser, Part 1
(1 U2 min—quick)

(16 mun—defsult)

EVKAH

VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 2
(1 mun—quick)
(18 min—default)

VAX CPU Cluster Exerciser
EVKAQ

VAX Bamc¢ Instructions Exerciser, Part 1

EVKAR

VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser, Part 2

EVKAS

VAX Floating-Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 1

EVKAT

VAX Floating-Point Instruction Exercieer, Part 2

Dagnostic software with file names boginmng with ER are tests created epecifi-

cally for the VAX 6000—400 system. This software
18 not transportable.

20perator intervention required.

2-36

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 2-8 (Cont.):
Diagnostic

Level

VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs
Diagnostic Title
VAX CPU Cluster Exerciser

EVKAU

VAX Pnvileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 1

EVKAV

VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 2
KDB50 Diagnostics

EVRLF

UDAS50/KDB50 Besic Subsystem Diagnostic

EVRLG

UDAS0/KDB50 Disk Drive Exerciser

EVRLB

VAX RAxx Formatter

EVRLJ

VAX UDA50-A’KDB50 Subsystem Exerciser

EVRLK

VAX Bad Block Replace Utility

EVRLL

Dhak Dnive Internal Error Log Utility

EVRAE

VAX Generic MSCP Disk Exerciser
DEBNA Diagnostics

EVDYD

DEBNA Online Functional Diagnostic

EVDWC

VAX NI Ezerciser
DEEBNI Diagnostics

EVDYE

DEBNI Online Functional Diagnortic

EVDWC

VAX NI Ezerciser
TBK Diagnostic

EVMDA

TK Data Relisbhhty Exerciser
CIBCA-AA Diagnostice

EVGCA

T1015 Repamar Level Diagnostic, Part 1

EVGCB

T1015 Repair Leve]l Dragnostic, Part 2

EVGCC

T1015 Repar Level Dingnostic, Part 3

Diagnostics

2-37

Table 2-8 (Cont.):
Diagnostic

Level

VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs
Diagnostic Title
CIBCA-AA Disgnostics

EVGCD

T1015 Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 4

EVGCE

T1025 Repair Level Disgnostic

EVGAA

CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 1

EVGAB

C] Funchona! Daagnostic, Part 2

EVGDA

CIBCA EEPROM Program and Update Utility

EVXCI

VAX CI Exerciser
CIBCA-BA Disgnostics

EVGEE

CIBCA-BA Repawr Level Dhagnostac, Part 1

EVGEF

CIBCA-BA Repair Level Disgnostic, Part 2

EVGEG

CIBCA-BA Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 3

EVGAA

Cl Functional Diagnostic, Part 1

EVGAB

CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 2

EVGDA

CIBCA EEPROM Program and Update Utihity

EVXCI

VAX C] Exeraiser
KLESI-B/TUS1 Diagnostics

EVMBA

VAX TU81 Data Reliability Diagnostac

EVMBB

VAX Front-End/Hoset Functional Dragnostic
DHB32 Diagnostice

EVDAR

DHB32 Dhagnostics

EVDAS

DHB32 Macrodisgnostics
DMB32 Diagnostics

EVAAA

VAX Line Printer Diagnostic

EVDAJ

DMB32 Online Asynchronous Port Test

2-38

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 2-8 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs
Diagnostic

Level

Diagnostic Title
DMB32 Disgnoostics

EVDAK

DMB32 Stand-Alone Functional Verification

EVDAL

DMBE32 Online Synchronous Port Test

EVDAN

DMB32 Online Dats Communications Link
DRB32 Diagnostics

EVDRH

DRB32-M, -E Functional Diagnostic

EVDRI

DRB32-W Functional Diagnostic
UNIBUS Diagnostics

EVCBB

VAX DWBUA VAXBI to UNIBUS

EVDRB

VAX DR11W Online Diagnostic

EVDRE

VAX DR11W Repair Level Diagnostic

EVDUP

DUP11 Repair Level, Part 1

EVAAA

VAX Line Pnnter Diagnostic (LP11)

EVDUQ

DUP11 Repair Level, Part 2
DSB32 Diagnostics

EVDAP

DSB32 Level 3 Diagnostic

EVDAQ

DSB32 Level 2R Diagnostic
RV20 Disgnostics

EVRVA

RV20 Level 3 Functional Diagnostic

EVRVB

RV20 Level 2R Diagnostic
XMA Online Memory Diagnostic

EVEKAM

VAX Memory User Mude Test

Diagnostics

2-39

D 09:0.0.0.0.00000 000000680000 ¢000000P ve00000000080008080
HNXA XA KA XX XX XX XK IO KA XX XN XA XA XA XK XA XK XK XAXK XX KX X
HHHK XX F K000 KKK XK A IO KA XX KK KA XK XX XK A AAAXXAKX
80¢¢44
600009
06000000 00.000908080604¢
P0.0:0.0.600600
110070.0.0.80.6.06.68.000.0.0.000¢890¢08095980808666940¢
0847900
0000
4509¢¢000800
3000
00 005088060
1000
) 0.0 9.96 00000000008 0000980009008008080¢004
P80.00.¢.6.00004868008606088406¢0¢000.¢0694
) 0.8.0900 69000000060 40460.0060050809084
P00 6.0 0000880000000060008086000¢8¢4
F 0.0 00t 000000000890¢0000880¢00¢0

XX XX XXX
XA0
XX XX OO
XX XX XA XX XKX
JOOOO0OMEOONIXX
XK XAXKAKKXKK
XA XK XAXA
XXCXA
093
19.9.00.6.000.006008060006
WX XX XX DA XK XX XK NKX
XHAX XK XX XA KAHX XA XKX

)0.8.0.8.0.099090$08084
b0 4.0.0.9.0.080¢9.464¢04
XXXXAXXKXAXXKXX
KAXKKXKXKKX

XXXXKAXXX
XXXAXXX
IOIXXX
¥K¥
£

<
XXXAX

NAXXXKX

XAXXXAKXX
1.9.9.0.0.4.4.9.9.6.94
XAXAXALAAXNLK

KX X
XK EX
XXOCXOOI

b0 0.0.49.6.8.000.8.04444
pH4:0.4.0.00800488803094

AXK
KK XA XAXKXAK
XARAXXA
00
00404
p oG08 0400 000960.009

PO 4000004000 00408080660806]

}0,6.0.0.0.0.00.0.6¢00.6¢000¢8840¢044

b0.8.0.6.00.9.0.9.0.66.90.59.080609090¢909¢4
10.0.0.0.0.0.490.0.0009.660080008000¢¢94
) 40000900066 0.046888.000086900808044

PO P8 8.0.000 0000 T 00000800600020004¢04
PO 060.00000.09869.0988.09088000800608¢4/
} 000 4.00.00.00.00.0600009.880.0.8604.806¢06068004

0
80880 049044
0000
000000 0600480.0054
19008.05000
0
630.6344
4000
00¢00.0069800
00809
F
0000
PO 0 0000

000,0004.6.090.6.0.0.8.0.00:0.0.09.080.¢6¢00080$00009098¢0
0:0.0.0.9.0.0.09.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.060.0.080.0.0.6.06496.000800080804000;
} 0. 0:0.00.9.80.9.000.0.6606600000000800080800008880008600

0
0608489;
0060000
0000 ¢ 064 000800000800088
PO SN0 009.0.0.0.0.0.

Chapter 3

KAG64A Scalar Processor
This chapter contains the following sections:

KAG64A Physical Description and Spetifications
KAG64A Configuration Rules
Functional Description
Boot Processor

Power-Up Sequence

KAG64A Self-Test Results: Console Display
KAG64A Self-Test Results: Module LEDs
KAGB4A Self-Test Results: XGPR Register
ROM-Based Diagnostics

KAG64A Self-Test—RBD 0

CPU/Memory Interaction Tests—RBD 1
VAX/DS Diagnostics

Machine Checks

Console Commands
KA64A Handling Procedures

How to Replace the Only Processor
How to Replace the Boot Processor

How to Add a New Processor or Replace a Secondary Processor
PATCH EEPROM Command
PATCH EEPROM Command Error Messages
KAG4A Registers

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3~1

3.1 KA64A Physical Description and Specifications
The KAG4A is a single-module VAX processor. The module
designation is T2015. VAX 6000400 systems include multiple
KAG64A processors, which use the 100 Mbyte/second XMI
system bus to communicate with memory. Features of the
module are shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1:

KAG4A Module
SYSTEM

FLOATING-POINT
PROCESSOR

SUPPORT
CHIP

XMI
INTERFACE

CHP

)
'

cLOCK
PROCESSOR

—~1._

CONTROL

—

CACHE

XM
CORNER

—

CONNECTOR
SEGMENTS

\rEu.cwyr

SELF-TES

TR L

RED

LEDs

_,E

............................

S—1 — —

e
e B

SECONDARY

EEPROM

II T

CACHE

)

el
f

0 F‘?M

——
ROM

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

ROM

CONSOLE

3-2

]

meb-0193-8%

Table 3—1:

KAG4A Speclfications

Parameter

Description

Module Number:

T20156

Dimensions:

233 em (8.2 VH x 0.6 e (0.25") W x 28.0 cm (11.0 D

Temperature:
Storage Range

Operating Range

-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 151°F)

6°C to 650°C (41°F to 122°F)

Relative Humidity:
Storage

10% to 5% noncondensing

Operating

10% to 95% noncondensing

Altitude:
Storage

Up to 4.8 km (16,000 R)

Operating

Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft)

Current:

BA at +5V

0.20A at +5VBB
Power:

41W

Cables:

None

Diagnoetics:

ROM-based diagnostics (0 and 1)
VAX/DS diagnostics, see Section 3.12.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-3

3.2 KA64A Configuration Rules
KA64A modules will operate in any slot of the XMI card cage;
however, nrocessors usually go on the right, beginning with
slot 1. Special rules apply if the KA84A has an aitachad
vector processor; see Section 4.3.

Figure 3-2:

Typical KAG4A Configuration

XMI CARC CAGE

|
] i
!

EDCBAGS®

B76543
O

21
—

PROCESSOR

SLOTS
meb-0054-88

3-4

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

By convention, processors are placed in the right XMI slots, beginning with
slot 1 and extending to slot 6. Memories are placed in the middle slots, from
slot A to slot 5 and then slots B and C, and VAXBI adapters are installed
in the left side of the card cage, beginning with slot E.
An attached vector processsor must be in the slot to the left of the KA64A
module. The slot to the left of the vector processor can be used only for a
memory module. Installing ancther kind of module can damage the vector
module.
For performance reasons, the scalar processor of a scalar/vector pair should
not be made the primary processor when other scalar processors are in the
system.

A processor module should be replaced if it consistently fails self-test, or
if it causes the operating system to crash. However, you can leave the
module in the system temporarily, since the console program prevents the
operating system from using that processor. If a processor module fails
intermittently, you should prevent the operating system from using it by
doir
g the following:
1.

Enter console mode.

Use the command SET CPU/NOENABLE to remove the processor from
the software configuration.

Reboot the operating system.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-5

3.3 Functional Description
The KAG4A processor has four functional sections (see
Figure 8-3): the CPU section, the backup cache, the XMI
interface, and the console and diagnostics sections.
Figure 3-3:

KAG4A Block Diagram

=
CPU

|
Contro!

with

Cache

Aux Comacle

Floatp?;“

Syetern and

Data

B
pont

Cache

EEPRAOM

Date arvi Address Linos

Date = | Aodr

AOM

‘ o

|
invg-Bus

Conwrol | Cach

Gom;

po V]

imertaco

;
Xt

|
ToVector _ VIB |
Modhule

{xCiook |

| xeatorx7 | | Comer

XM Bus

>
meb-0181-89

3-6

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The CPU section includes:
The processor chip, which supports the VAX instruction set and data
types. It contains a 64-entry, fully associative translation buffer for both
process and system-space mappings. The processor chip includes a 2Kbyte, direct-mapped, write-through instruction and data cache with a
quadword block and fill size.

A floating-point accelerator chip that enhances the computation phase
of floating-point and some integer instructions. This chip receives
operands from the processor chip, computes the result, and passes the
result and status back to the processor chip to complete the instruction.
The backup cache is a 128-Kbyte, direct-mapped, write-through instruction
and data cache. It is implemented in 24 16-Kbyte x 4 data KAMs. The
backup cache contains 2-Kbyte tags, organized to provide an octaword fill
sire and a 4-octaword block size.
The XMI interface includes:

An octaword write buffer that decreases bus and memory controller
bandwidth needs by packing writes into larger, more efficient blocks
prior to sending them to main memory.

Cache fill legic that loads the backup cache with four octawords of data

on each cache miss.

XMI write monitoring logic that uses a duplicate tag store to detect
when another XMI node writes a memory location that is cached on this
processor. Then the XMI interface chips invalidate the corresponding
entry in the backup cache
Full set of error recovery and logging capabilities.

KAG64A Scalar Processor

3-7

Example 3-1:

ROM and EEPROM Vergion Numbers

9123456789 0123456789 0122456789 012345674
F

[

8TF

BPD

rRoM0 = v1 00D

3-8

NODE
¢
TYP

ETF

BPD

XBI
D +

XBl
E +

ILv

128Mb

Romi = v1.008

EEPROM = 1.00/1.0000

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

8N = 86012345670

The console and diagnostics sections include:
A console read-only memory (ROM), which contains the code for
initialization, executing console commands, and bootstrapping the
system. The last line of the self-test display shows the ROM version.

In this example, callout @ indicates that the console ROM, ROMO, is

version V1.00.

A diagnostic ROM, ROM1, which contains the power-up self-test and
exiended diagnostics.
The diagnostic ROM has the same version

number as the console ROM. In this example callout @ indicates that
the diagnostic ROM is version V1.00.

An electrically-erasable, programmable ROM (EEPROM), which
contains system parameters and boot code.
You can modify the
parameters with the console SET commands. Patching console and
diagnostic code in the ROMs is accomplished by reading the patches into
a special area of the EEPROM. The console PATCH EEPROM command
18 described in Section 3.18.

The last line of the self-test display shows two EEPROM version

numbers.

The first number @ indicates the format version of the

EEPROM. This version is changed only when the internal structure
of the EEPROM is modified.

The eecond number @ is the revision of ROM patches that have been

applied to the EEPROM. The major number in this revision (before the

decimal point) corresponds to the major number of the ROM revision @.

The minor number indicates the actual patch revision. In this example,
the EEPROM has not been patched for console ROM V1.00.
A system support chip (RSSC) that includes support for external ROM/
EEPROM, 1 Kbyte of battery-backed-up RAM, console terminal UARTS,
bus reset logic, interval timer, programmable timers, time-of-year
(TOY) clock, bus timeout, and halt arbitration logic.

KA64A Scalar Processor

3-89

3.4 Boot Processor
In the VAX 6000-400 system all KAG4A processors share
systemn resources equally. The processor controlling the
conscle at any given time is designated as the primary

or boot processor.
The others are called secondary
processors. The boot processor is selected during the powerup sequence.

Figure 3-4:

Selection of Boot Processor

CPUWITH
LOWEST
XM! NODE 1D
I
|
!

|
IGI

ELIGIBLE

|
|

CPU gw'usnm
LOWEST

XM! NODE ID
[\
l

BOOT PROCESSOR
meb-0081-89

3-10

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Using boot code stored in its EEPROM, the boot processor reads the boot
block from a specified device. Booting may be triggered by a command

issued to the boot processor from the console, or by a system reset with the
bottom key switch in the Auto Start position.

The boot processor also communicates with the system console, using
the common console lines on the backplane. When you change system
parameters in the EEPROM using SET commands, the boot processor
automatically copies the new values to the EEPROMs on the secondary
processors. If you swap in a new KA64A module, it should be configured
as a secondary processor. Then you can use the UPDATE command to copy
the boot processor’s entire EEPROM to the new secondary. See the VAX
6000—400 Owner’s Manual for a description of the UPDATE command.
Usually the processor with the lowest XMI node number (which is also
the lowest slot number) is selected as the boot processor. However, if this

processor does not pass all its power-up tests, the next higher-numbered
processor is selected. This is one way the boot processor can change.

The user also has control over boot processor selection with the SET CPU
command. This command may declare a processor ineligible for selection.
SET CPU can also select a boot processor explicitly.
You can see the boot processor selection three ways:
¢

In the self-test display. the boot processor is indicated by a B on the
second line labeled BPD.

In console mode. the command SHOW CPU displays the boot processor
as "Current primary.”

The bottom red LED is off on the boot processor module. It is lit on
secondary processors.

KAB64A Scalar Processor

3-11

3.5 Power-Up Sequence
Figure 3-5 shows the power-up sequence for KAG4A
processors. All processors execute two phases of self-test,
and a boot processor is selected The boot processor tests
the VAXBI adapters and prints the self-test display.
Figure 3-5:

KAG4A Power-Up Sequence, Part 1 of 2
Powar-up OF sysem reset (coid)

Sefl-Tes!

Sel.Tes!

-3

Dewrming
Boo! Procassor

Detsrrmune
Boot Prooessor

Se-Teat

.J
se s

Detorm:ne
Boo! Prooessor

h. 4

“Bool Procosso’ st

all memory moduies
K5Ad

Boot Processor pnnts
sel-test results

Boot Prooesso’ signass
ai! CPUs to stant CPU/MEM tests
il
i
——

cPU 1

CPUAAEM tasts

CPU2

CPUMEM tesis

ses

cPUn

CPUMEM tests
i

)

]

Determing

Boot Processor

Determine

Boot Processor

tos

Detarmine

Boot Processo’

NOTE. Tho second determination of the oot procassor oocurs
ewen if the onginai boot procsssor passes ali mamory 1osts.

3-12

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

msp-0047-88

All CPUs execute their on-board self-tests at the beginning of the powerup tests. On line STF of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown
for every module whose self-test pasases (see Section 3.6).
The boot processor is determined as described in Section 3.4. On the
first BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor selected as
boot processor. Because the processors have not yet completed their
power-up tests, the designated processor may later be disqualified from
being boot processor. For this reason, line BPD appears twice in the
self-test display.

The boot processor tests all memory modules, and then prints the
results of self-test, lines NODE, TYP, ETF, and BPD on the self-test
display. The boot processor then signals all CPUs to start running the
extended test.
All CPUs execute an extended test using the memories. On line ETF
of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown for every module that
passes extended test.

If all CPUs pass the extended test, the original boot processor selection
is still valid. Lines STF and ETF would be identical for all the
processors.

The yellow LED and the top red LED are lit on all processor modules
that pass both power-up tests. On the secondary processors, the bottom
red LED is also lit. On the boot processor, this red LED is off (see
Figure 3-7).

If the original boot processor fails the extended test (indicated by a
minus sign (-) on line ETF), a new boot processor is selected. On the
second BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor finally
selected as boot processor.

KAE4A Scalar Processor

3-13

Figure 3-6:

KAG4A Power-Up Sequence, Part 2 of 2

. 2

Boot Processor prints
CPUMEM test results

Boot Prooussor
sxecics DWMBA 1eets
!

.
Boot Prooessor prints
DWNBA tos! results
. 3

Boot Prooessor hats in consoie

mode or boots operating system
S

it Boot Prooessor s booting

operabng sysiam, stans ali attached
CPUs after 00! prooessor has booted

CPU 1

running

CPU2

funning

cPUnN

funning
meb-0048-889

3-14

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

® The boot processor prints line ETF and the second BPD line of the

self-test display. If none of the processors i1s successfully selected as

the boot processor, no self-test results are displayed and the console
hangs You can identify this hung state by examining the LEDs on the
processor modules (see Section 3.7). All yellow LEDs will be OFF. The
group of seven red LEDS indicate the failing test number in binarycoded decimal.

@ The boot processor tests the DWMBA. Test results are indicated on the
lines labeled XBI on the self-test display. A plus sign (+) at the extreme
right means that the adapter test passed; a minus sign (~) meaans that
the test failed.

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-135

3.6 KAG64A Self-Test Results: Console Display
You can check KA64A self-test results in three ways: the selftest display, the lights on the module, and the contents of the
XGPR register. Pertinent information in the self-test display
is shown in Example 3-2. See Chapter 4 for information on
systems with vector modules.

Example 3-2:

Self-Test Results

$123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567.0
F

[

ROMO = V1.00

NODE ¢

BPD

TYP

XBI

128Mb

ROMl = V1.00

EEPROM = 1.00/1.00

SN = 56012345670

>>>

@ The first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line

prints if a KA64A module is in node 1 and the baud rate is at least
1200. The progress trace has two purposes: to give a visual indication
that the system is functioning during self-test, and, if self-test fails,
to display the failing test number. The numbers correspond to the 37
tests in the KA64A self-test. When self-test passes, the line prints as
in Example 3-2. If a test fails, the failing test number is the last one
printed. For example, if test 14 fails, the line is printed as follows:
#123456789 01234

©® This line indicates the type (TYP) of module at each XMI node.

Processors are type P. In this example, processors are at nodes 1, 2,
3, and 4.

3-16

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

® This line shows self-test fail status (STF), which are the results of onboard self-test. Possible values for processors are:
+ (pass)

- {{ail)

All processors passed self-test in this example.

The BPD hne indicates boot processor designation. When the system
completes on-board self-test, the processor with the lowest XMI ID
number that passes self-test and is ehigible is selected as boot processor
— in this example, the processor at node 1.
The results on the BPD line indicate:
¢

The boot processor (B)

Processors eligible to become the boot processor (E)

Processors ineligible to become the boot processor (D)

Dunng extended test (ETF) all processors run additional tests. which
include reading and writing memory and using the cache. On hne ETF,
results are reported for each processor in the same way as on line STF—
a plus sign indicates that extended test passed and a minus sign that
extended test failed. In this example, the processor at node 1 (onginally
selected boot processor) failed the CPU/memory interaction tests.
Another BPD line is displayed. because it is possible for a different

CPU to be designated boot processor before the system actually boots.
This occurs in this example, because the processor a. node 1 failed the
extended test. The lowest-numbered processor that passed both tests is
the processor at node 2. However, a previous SET CPU/NOPRIMARY
command has made this processor ineligible to be boot processor
(indicated by the designation D on the BPD line).
Therefore, the
processor at node 3 is designated boot processor.

The bottom line of the self-test display shows the ROM and EEPROM
version numbers and the system serial number.

A KAG64A performs additional tests on an attached FV64A vector module
(see Section 4.5).

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3~17

3.7 KAG4A Self-Test Results: Module LEDs
You can check KA64A self-test results in the self-test display,
in the lights on the module, or in the XGPR register. If selftest passes, the large yellow LED is on.

Figure 3-7:

KAG64A LEDs Atier Power-Up Seli-Test

-~
~.

SELF-TEST PASSED

'C}‘ |

iida) u .B

O |

YELLOW

SELF-TEST FAILED

RED
RED

P
S

BOOT CPU

3-18

ON
oFF
oFF

rm—

——

ON
. OFF

SECONDARY CPU

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

OFF
MOST

SIGNIFICANT
BIT

FAILING
TEST NUMBER

(BINARY-CODED
DECIMAL,

msb-0176R-88

If self-test passes, the large yellow LED at the top of the LEDs is ON.
(Here self-test means both the on-board power-up tests, RBD 0, and the
CPU/memory interaction tests, RBD 1.) The top red LED (next to the
yellow one) is also ON, and the next five red LEDs are OFF. The bottom
LED is OFF if the processor 1s the boot processor, and ON if it is a secondary
processor.

If self-test fails, the yellow LED is OFF, and the red LEDs contain an error
code that corresponds to the number of the failing test. The test number is
represented in binary-coded decimal. In the seven red error LEDs, the most

significant bit is at the top, but the lights have a reverse interpretation —
a bit is ONE if the Lght 1s OFF.
For example, assume a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF) and
shows the following pattern in its seven red LEDs:
TOP

(MSB)

cff

off

=«

BCTTOM

The failing test number decodes to 011 0010 (binary-coded decimal 32). If
you then ran RBD 0 with the /TR and /HE qualifiers, the last test number
you would see displaved is T0032.
When any of the red error LEDs is lit, a failure has occurred during the
self-test sequence. But svstem power-up self-test actually comprises three
sets of tests: KA64A power-up tests (RBD 0), CPU/memory interaction tests
(RBD 1), and VAXBI adapter (DWMBA) tests (RBD 2).

Interpretation of

the processor board error lights depends on which set of tests was running,
as explained below and in Table 3-9.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-19

Processor error LEDs can also indicate failures of memories
or VAXBI adapters.

Table 3-9:

KA64A Error LEDs

(R';e‘d LEDs
inary-

Yellow

coded

Diagnostic and

Test Number

Device Failing

Line

OFF

1-37*

Power-up self-test (RBD 0)

KAG4A

STF

OFF

50-62°

OFF

LED

decimal)

T0001-T0037
See Table 3—6.

CPU.memory test - Memory 1

Self-Test

(RBD 1) T0001-T0013
See Table 3-7.

tmodule with lowest XMI node number)

KAG64A or MSG62A1

ETF

CPU'memory test - Memory 2
T0003

MS62A 2

ETF

MS62A 3

ETF

MS62A 4

ETF

MS62A 5

ETF

MS62A 6

ETF

MS62A 7

ETF

CPU/memory test - Memory 8
T0003

MS62A 8

ETF

DWMBA test {RBD 2

DWMBA

XBI

tequivalent to ST1T=3)

OFF

CPU'memory test - Memory 3
T0003
tequivalent to ST1T=3)

CFF

CPU memory test - Memorv 4
T0003
tequivalent to ST1/T=3)

OFF

CPU'memory test - Memory 5
T0003
tequivalent to ST1/T=3)

OFF

CPU memory test - Memory 6
T0003
tequivalent to ST1/T=3)

OFF

CPU memory test - Memory 7
T0003
tequivalent to ST/ T=3)

OFF

tequivalent to ST1/T=3)

1-26

T0001-T0026
See Table 6-5.

*Applies W scalar-only configuration If scalar CPU running tests has an attached vector module, the power-up tests are 1-49, and the CPU/memory tests are 50-66.

3-20

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

If a processor’s vellow LED is OFF and the red LEDs show an error code
in the range 1-37, the power-up self-test failed and the processor board is
bad. On the self-test console display, the processor shows a minus sign (-)
on the STF line.
After the power-up tests, each processor runs the CPU/memory interaction
tests. If a test fails, the processor shows a minus sign (=) on the ETF line
of the self-test console display The LED error codes are numbered from 50
to 62, which is the failing test number (1 through 13) plus 49. For example,
assume that a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF) and shows the
followang pattern in the error LEDs:
TOP

(MSB)

off

cff

BOTTOM

The failing test number decodes to 101 0110 (binary-coded decimal 56),

which corresponds to the seventh CPU/memory interaction test ((56—49 =
7).) 1f you then run RBD 1 with the /TR and /HE qualifiers, the last test
number you see displayed 1s T0007.

Each processor. after testing with the first memory, runs the CPU/memory
interaction tests on every other good memory module.
(However, only
CPU’memory interaction test T0003 is run.) If a failure occurs. the memory

module is probably bad. although the processor’s yellow light is OFF and
the memory module's yellow hight is ON. If several processors fail on the

same memecry, the memory is certainly bad. Try using SET MEMORY to
configure the bad module out of the interleave set. For error codes higher
than 66, consult Table 3-9 to determine the failing memory.

The last series is the DWMBA tests. If one fails, the red LEDs contain an

error code. although the processor’s yellow self-test LED is ON (because the
CPU itself has passed). The failing test numbers are listed in Table 6-5.
Note that only the boot processor performs the DWMBA tests.

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-21

3.8 KA64A Self-Test Results: XGPR Register
You can check KA64A self-test results in the self-test display,
in the lights on the module, or in the XGPR register. When a
failure occurs during power-up and the failing test number
cannot be found in the module LEDs and RBDs cannot be
run, yvou can examine the XGPR register. The failing test
number is left in the upper byte of the XGPR register of the
failing KAG64A processor or of the boot processor if a memory
or DWMBA module fails.

Example 3-3:
>>>

E'P/L

21900C2C

XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Fallure

2190000C

Examine the

3Crmyyvyw

21900002, the address of the XGFR
register of the KA64A proceesor in
The

result

longword at

indicates

KA64A self-test
tc

>>>

E F/L

2188B000C

2188000C

490w

>>>

£18BC0CC

E'F'L

interprei

Examine the

evplained

Evam:ne

RATavMvywvw

DWMBA

test

number

See

XGPR

which
kit

<31>

Table

the

3-4

of the KRéE4A

slet

(which

failure):

elot
of

the

below.

3IC

Derivation c¢f

interaction test

the

Lisregarcd

test

address

returned.

XGPR register

address

processcr,

SiB81TIT

data

in slot

CPU/memcry

that

failed.

the

processor
is

physical

the

failed.

the

boct

indicates
failing

tess

When a failure occurs in power-up test, vou can examine the XGPR register

to determine the failing test number The XGPR register of the KA64A
processor that failed self-test or CPU/memory interaction test, or of the
boot processor if DWMBA test {ailed, contains the failing test number. If
all power-up tests pass, the XGPR register contains other data and should
be ignored.

To examine the XGPR register, first see Table 3-3 to determine the base
address (BB) of the KA64
A processor’s node. Then calculate the address of
the XGPR register by add ng 0C (hex) to the base address.

3-22

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The failing test number is derived from the upper byte (bits <31:24>) of the
longword returned For self-test, the upper byte contains the failing test
number. If CPU/memory interaction test fails, this byte contains the faihng
test number plus 49. If DWMBA test fails, bit <31> is set (making the first
digit 8 through A), and bits <30.24> contain the failing test number. All
numbers are expressed 1n binary-coded deamal (BCD). See Table 3-4.

Slot
1

2
3
4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12
13
14

Table 3—4:

XMl Base Addresses
Node

Base Address (BB)

mcqg)emqmaowwu

Table 3-3:

2188 0000
2190 0000

2198 0000
21A0 0000

21A8 0000
21B0 0000
21B8 0000
21C0 0000

21C8 0000
21D0 0000

21D8 0000
21E0 0000

21E8 0000
21F0 0000

Interpreting XGPR Falling Test Numbers
XGPR <30:24>

Test

Clear

1-49

CPU memory ipteraction test

Clear

50-66

1-17

Additional memory

Clear

67-73

DWMBA test

Set

1-26

Failing Diagnostic

XGPR <31>

Self-rest

(BCD)

Numbers

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-23

3.9 ROM-Based Diagnostics
The KA64A ROMs contain four diagnostics, which you run
using the boot processor’s RBD monitor program described
in Chapter 2. RBD 0 and RBD 1 test the boot processor. RBD
2 tests the DWMBA/A and DWMBA/B adapters, and RBD 3
tests XMl memories.

Table 3-5:

ROM-Based Diagnostics

Disgnostic

Test

KAG4A self-test

KA64A CPU/memory interaction tests

DWMBA tests

XMI! memory tests

3-24

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

RBD 0 1s the same as the KA64A self-test. It i1s useful for running several
passes when a processor fails self-test intermuttently. Section 3.10 shows
examples of running RBD 0 on both the boot processor and a secondary
processor, and hsts the tests in RBD 0.
RBD 1 is the same as the CPU/memory interaction tests. It is useful for
running several passes when a processor fails CPU/memory interaction
tests intermittently. Section 3.11 shows an example and hsts the tests.
RBD 2 is the set of tests that the boot processor runs for each DWMBA
VAXBI-to-XM! adapter when the system is powered on (The DWMBA has
no on-board self-test of its own.) Section 6.4 shows an example and lists
the tests.

RBD 3 is a set of XMI memory tests that sizes and runs extended tests on
all of memory Sections 5.10 and 5.11 list the tests and show examples.
For a detailed explanation of the diagnostic printout, see Chapter 2.

KAG64A Scalar Processor

3-25

3.10 KAG4A Self-Test—RBD 0
RBD 0 is equivalent to the KABG4A self-tests. The first 37 tests
test scalar CPU modules; tests 38-49 test vector modules.

Example 3-4:
>>>

KAG4A Seli-Test—RBD 0
Command to

T/R

enter RBD monitor program.

RBD1>

RBD monitor prompt,

RBL1>

decimal node number of the boot processor.
Runs the FAG4A self-test on boot processcr

STO/TR/HE

Trace

Test

1.00

;XRP_ST

where

prints each test

number:

TOOC1

TY002

TOOG3

TO004

TOCCE

$0006

TOOO7

TOO08

;

TOC1l1

T0012

TO013

TOCi4

TOCIS

70016

TOCC1?

TOO1

8082
x

10
roo1s@

3 2]
1
HE REXS27

halt

error

results written to the conscle terminal:

;

the hexa-

TOOCS®

7TOO010

1C ARRRARRA ABAAAARA 00000000 000004AC 2006451F 01

;
;

;00000000 60000001

8062

00000000 60000000 00000000 00000000 000000CO

RBLC1>

In Example 3—4:

@ Test 18 failed. The /HE switch causes execution to stop when the error
is encountered.

@ F indicates failure.

® The diagnostic ran for one pass.

3-26

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Example 3-5:

Running

KAG64A Selt-Test (RBD 0) on

a Secondary

Processor

>>> SET CPU 2"
>>>

T/R

RBD2> ST0 /TRQ
1.00

;XRP_ST
T0001

T00C2

T0003

TO004

T000S

TO006

TOCCT7

TOO08

TOOC9®

TOOLO

TOOl1

TOC12

TO013

TO014

TOC1S

T00l6

T0017

TOU18

TOC1l9

TOC20

;

T00Z21

T00:2

TO023

TO0024

TOC25

T0026

T0027

10028

TO0029

TO0030

’

TOO031

T0032

T0033

T0034

T0035

T0036

10037

8082

;ODOOGOOC 00000000 00000000 0000000C 000000000 00000000 00000000

In Example 3-5:

@ This command causes the KA64A module at node 2 to become the
primary processor.

The prompt indicates that the CPU at node 2 is the primary processor.
RBD 0 1s run on this processor.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-27

Table 3-6:

KAG64A Self-Test—RBD 0

Test

Function

T0001

KAB4A ROM Checksum Test

T0002

IPL Step-Down Test

T0003

RSSC Configuration Register Test

T0004

RSSC RAM Test

To0005

RSSC Output Port Test

T0006

RSSC Address Decode Register Access Test

T0007

RSSC Console UART External Loopback and Baud Rate Test

TO008

RSSC Console UART Internal Loopback and Interrupt Test

T0009

KA64A EEPROM Test

To010

RSSC Input Port Test

Too11

RSSC Bus Tumeout Test

TO012

RSSC Programmable Tumers Test

T0013

RCSR Register Test

TO014

RSSC TOY Clock Test

T0015

RSSC Interval Timer Test

To016

Interrupts at IPL 14 to 17 Test

T0017

Primary Cache Tag Store Test

T0018

Primary Cache Data RAM March Test

T0019

Backup Tag Store Test

T0020

Flush Cache Test

T0021

Backup Tag Store Panty Error Test

To022

C-Chip Pnmary Tag Store Test

T0023

€-Chip Refresh Register Teat

T0024

Ba’ kup Cache Data Line Test

Ton25

Backup Cache Date RAM March Test

T0026

Backup Cache Data Parity RAM March Test

To027

Cache Mask Write Test

3-28

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 3-6 (Cont):

KA64A Self-Test—RBD 0

Test

Function

TO028

Data Parity Logc Test

T0029

Cache Dhsable Test

T0030

XGPR Register Test

T0031

CNAK Test

T0032

IVINTR Test

T0033

Multiple Interrupt Test

T0034

DC520 Critical Path Test

T0035

F-Chup Test

T0036

Disable F-Chup Test

T0037

F-Chip Critical Path Test

T0038

VECTL Registers Test

T0039

Verse Regigters Test

T0040

Load/Store Regsters Test

To041

VIB Error Logic Test

T0042

Other VECTL Chup Logic Test

T0043

Verse and Favor Test

T0044

Load'Store Translation Buffer and CAM Test

T0045

Load'Store Cache Test

T0046

Load 'Store Instruction Test

T0047

Load'Store Tag and Duplicate Tag Test

T0048

Load’Store Error Cases Test

T0049

Module Critical Path Test

KAG6¢ 4 Scalar Processor

3-29

3.11 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests — RBD 1
RBD 1 is equivalent to the CPU/memory interaction tests.
The first 13 tests test scalar CPU modules; tests 14-17 test
vector modules.

CPU/Mc=ory Interaction Tests—-RBD 1

Example 3-6:
>>> T/R

Command to enter RBD monitor program

RBD3>

RBl monitor prompt,

where 3 is the hexa-

decamal

node number

c¢f

that

currently

Runs the CPU/memcry interaction RBD with

trace,

RBL3> ST1/TR/HE

halt

error.

writtern to the

Test

input.

results

conscle terminal:

106

; CPUMEM
.

TOOO1

TOCCZ

TCOS3

;

T0011

T0ClZ

TOO13

131

;G0000000C 00000020

TO004

8082

TOOOS

T0006

TOOGT

TOOO8

TO009

00COC000 000DOO00 0000300C 00000000 000000CC

REL 3>

In the example above:

P means that the diagnostic ran successfully.

One pass was completed.

3-30

the processor

receiving your

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

TOOLG

Table 3-7: CPU/Memory Interaction Tests—RBD 1
Test

Function

T0001

Panty Error CNAK Read/Wnite Test

T0002

Miss When Invalid Test

T0003

Cache Read Fill Test

T0004

Interlock Instruction Cache Test

To005

Octaword Wrnite Buffer Test

TO0006

Quadword-Boundary Byte Write Buffer Test

T0007

Two-Byte Write in Different Quadword Write Buffer Test

T000S

Wnte Buffer Switch and Purge Test

To009

Statistical Write Buffer Test

T0010

Hit Write Buffer Test

T0011

Write Buffer Address Test

T0012

Invalidate Test

T0013

Hit on Disabled Tag Store Test

T0O014

Cache Test

T0015

Wnite Buffer Test

To016

Dupbicate Tag Test

T0017

Miscellaneous Error Test

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3=31

3.12 VAX/DS Diagnostics
The KA64A software diagnostics that run under the VAX
Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) are listed in Table 3-8. An
example follows. See Section 2.4 for instructions on running
the supervisor. See Section 4.8 for vector-specific tests.

Table 3-8:

KAGB64A VAX/DS Diagnostics

Program

Description

EVSBA

VAX Stand-Alone Autosizer

EVSBB

VAX Lnagnostic Online Autogizer

EVKAQ

VAX Basi¢ Instructions Exeraser, Part 1

EVEAR

VAX Basc Instructions Exerciser, Part 2

EVEKAS

VAX Floating Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 1

EVKAT

VAX Ficating Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 2

EVKAU

VAX Pnvileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 1

EVEAV

VAX Pnvileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 2

ERKAX

Manual Tests

ERKMP

Multprocessor Exerciser

Example 3-7:

VAX/DS Commands for Running Stand-Alone Processor
Diagnostics

ps> rRun evsea@®

pe> sEL kac®
DS> RUN ERKAXED
DS> EXITO

3-32

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The callouts in Example 3-7 are explained below:

Run the stand-alone autosizer; then you do not need to attach devices
to the supervisor explicitly. However, if you want to know how to use
the Attach command for a speafic diagnostic, enter:
DS> HELF diagnostic_name ATTACH

The instruction and manual tests run on the boot processor. If the
boot processor 15 the CPU with the lowest XMI node number (which
18 usually the case). issue the command to select KAO. The Diagnostic
Supervisor numbers the processors consecutively. For example, if the
KA64A module with the second-lowest XMI node number were boot
processor, vou would select KAl.

® This example runs the manual tests (ERKAX), which include powerfail,

machine check, restart, and EEPROM functions. The diagnostic prints
messages, and you must manually intervene using console switches.

(4] Exit from VAX/DS.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-33

3.13 Machine Checks
Figure 3-8 and Table 3-89 show parameters for machine
checks. The KA64A machine check parse tree appears in
Appendix E along with parse trees for hard and soft error
interrupts.

Figure 3-8:

The Siack In Response to & Machine Check

BYTE COUNT

spP

MACHINE CHECK CODE

SP.4

VIRTUAL ADDRESS

SP.8

VIRTUBL INSTRUCTION BUFFER ADDRESS

SP.C

INTERRUPT STATE

SP.+10

INTERNAL STATE

SP+14

INTERNAL REGISTEP

SP.18

PROGRAM COUNTER

SP+1C

PROCESSOR STATUS LONGWORD

SP+20

ms5-0180R-89

Table 3-9:

Machine Check Parameters

Parameter
Byte Count (SP.

Value
(hex) or

Bit

Description

Size of stack frame 1n bytes, not including PSL, PC,
or bvte count longword

Machine check code (SP+4:

3-34

Floating-point operand or result transfer error

Floating-point reserved instruction

Floating-point operand panty error

Flaating-point unknown status error

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 3~9 (Cont.):

Machine Check Parameters
Value
(hex} or

Bit

Description

Floating-pant returned resuit panty error

Translation buffer muss in ACV/TNV microfiow

Transiation buffer hit in ACV/TNV microfiow

Undefined INT.ID value

Undefined MOVCx state

Undefined instruction trap code

Undefined control store address

Cache read tag'data parity error

DAL bus or dats panty read error

DAL bus error on write or clear write buffer

Undefined bus error microtrap

‘ector module error

Virtual instruction buffer

<31:0>

Current virtual instruction buffer address

Interrupt state (SP+10:

<22>

ICCS it <6>

<151>

SISR bite <15.1>

<3124>

IDhfference between current PC and opcode PC

<20 16>

Addrees of last memory reference

<17 16>

Data length of last memory reference

<15:8>

Opcode

<3:0>

Last GPR referenced by E-box

Parameter

Virtual addrese (SP+8)
address (SP+C

Internal state (SP+14,

<310> Current contents of VAP reguster

Internal remster (SP+18;

«310>

Program counter (SP+1C)

<31:(>

PC at the start of the current instructi~n

Processor status longword

<31:0>

Current contents of PSL

(SP+20)

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-35

3.13 Console Cornmands
Table 3-10 summarizes the console commands. Commands
specific to the VAX 6000 series include CLEAR EXCEPTION,
RESTORE EEPROM, SAVE EEPROM, SET BOOT, SET CPU,
and Z. The VAX 6000-400 Owmer's Manual gives & full
description of each command, its qualifiers, and examples.

Table 3-10:

Console Commands

Command

Function
Imtializes the system, causing a self-test, and begins the boot

BOOT

program.

CLEAR EXCEPTION

Cleans up error state 1n XBER and RCSR reqsters.

CONTINUE

Beginge processing at the address where processing was interrupted by 8 CTRL/P console command.

DEPOSIT

Stores data 1n a specified addreas.

EXAMINE

Displavs the contents of e specified address.

FIND

Searches main memorv for a page-aligned 256-Kbvte block of
good memory or for a restart parameter block.

HALT

Null command, no action 1# taken eince the processor has already halted in order w enter console mode.

HELP

Prints explanation of console commands

INITIALIZE

Performs & svetem reset, including self-test.

REPEAT

Ezxecutes the command passed as 1t argument.

RESTORE EEPROM

Copier the TK tapes EEPROM contents to
ROM of the processor executing the command.

SAVE EEPROM

Copies to the TK tape the contents of the EEPROM of the processor executing the command.

SET BCOT

Stores 8 boot command by a mckname.

SET CPU

Speaifies eligibiity of processors to become the boot processor or whether the vector proceasor 18 to be 1ncluded 1n the system configuration

3-36

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

the

EEP-

Table 3-10 (Cont.):

Consoie Commands

Comm and

Function

SET LANGUAGE

Changes the output of the console error messages between numeric code only (international mode: and code plus explanation (English mode).

SET MEMORY

Demgnates the method of interleaving the memory modules, supersedes the console program's default interleavg

SET TERMINAL

Sets console terminal charactenstics.

SHOW ALL

Dieplayvs the current vi'ue of parameters set.

SHOW BOOT

Displave all boot comma:
1# and micknames that have been
saved umng SET BOOT.

SHOW CONFIGURATION

Displave the hardware device ."pe and revision level for
each XMl and VAXB! node an:
indicates self-test status.

SHOW CPU

Jldentifies the pruimary processor and ti ¢ status of other proces80TSs

SHOW ETHERNET

Locates all Ethernet
plavs their addresses.

SHOW LANGUAGE

Dhsplave the mode currently set for console e ror messsges, 13ternational or English.

SHOW MEMORY

Displavs the memorv lines from the svstem self-te .. showing interleave and memory size.

SHOW TERMINAL

Displavs the baud rate and terminal characte:
1ng on the console termunal

START

Beginis execution of ap instruction at
fied 1n the command string

STOP

Halts the specified node.

TEST

Passer control to the self-test diagnostice;. '/RBD qualifier in-

adapters

t.°

systes

and

dis-

ucs function-

the address spea-

vokes ROM-based diagnostics.

UPDATE

Copies contents of the EEPROM on the processor executing the command to the EEPROM of another procesBOT.

Logically connecte the console termunal to another proces-

sor on the XM bus or 1o @ VAXBI node.

Introduces a comment.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-37

3.14 KAG64A Handling Procedures
The KAG64A module is static sensitive and fragile.

The

MOS2 technology used on this module is more vulnerable

to static than past technology. The 25 mil leads used to
attach chips to the module are very small, close together,
and easily bent.
Careless handling can easily damage
the module. Follow these procedures when handling this
module.

Figure 3-8:

Holding the KA64A Module

|
/

S//
Ve p,

;

{ ‘ Lu"q
I.-—---,

‘;

[

'f‘
\\\‘,\’

‘

\\:\\
LS

uwéw‘

—

mgb-0228-9C

3-38

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The KA64A module must be handled carefully Figure 3-8 shows the
proper way to hold the module. Be sure your hands do not touch any
components, leads, or XMI fingers. When inserting it in or removing it from
the XMI card cage, grasp the module only at the spot shown in Figure 3-9,
avoiding any contact with the 25 mil leads. Do not use any component as
a handle.

To avoid damaging the KA64A module, follow these handling procedures:
1.

Always wear an antistatic wnst strap.

Before removing the module from its ESD box, place the box on a clean,
stable surface.

Be sure the box will not slide or fall. Never place the box on the floor.
And be sure no tools, papers, manuals, or anything else that might
damage the module are near 1t. Some components on this module can
be damaged by a 600-volt static charge; paper, for example, can carry
a charge of 1000 volts

Hold the module orly by the edges. as shown in Figure 3-8.

Do not hold the module so that vour fingers touch any components or
leads Be sure vou do not bend the module as you are holding 1t.
4

Be sure nothing touches the module surface or any of its components.
If anything touches the module, components or leads can be damaged.
This includes the antistatic wrist strap. clothing, jewelry. cables,
components on other modules, and anything in the work area (such
as tools, manuals, or loose papers)

Remove vour jacket and roll up vour sleeves before handling the module.

Also remove any jewelry.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-39

Inserting the KAG4A Module in an XMI Card Cage

T s
I

]

s| ¥

Hinjuln

s O Gy1 Gy

Figure 3-9:

3~40

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

You must take special precautions when inserting the KA64A module in or
removing it from the XMI card cage.
1

Be sure. when inserting the module in or removing it from the XMI
card cage. that no part of the module comes in contact with another
module or a cable.
When swapping out a module, place it in an unused XMI slot. if one is

available, or set the module on an ESD mat while vou install the new
module.

A unused XMI slot is the best place to leave a module that is being
swapped out until it can be placed in the ESD box. If there are no
extra slots, place the module yeu removed on an ESD mat on a stable,
uncluttered surface, with side 1 (the side with the hea: zinks) up. Do
not put it on the top of the system cabinet. And never siide the module
across any surface. The leads on the components are fragile and can be

damaged by contact with fingers or any surface.

Hold the XMI card cage handle while removing or inserting the module.
If it is not held in place. the handle can spring down and damage the
module.
When inserting the module in the card cage. grasp it as shown in

Figure 3-9. and shde it slowly and gently into the slot.

Do not attach the repair tag to the module.
Place the repair tag in the plastic bag attached to the bottom of the
ESD box Allowing the repair tag to come in contact with the module
can cause damage to a component.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-41

3.15 How to Replace the Only Processor
When replacing the processor module in a single-processor
system, you must RESTORE the EEPROM image previously
saved on a TK tape. This ensures a correct EEPROM image
in the new processor.

CAUTION: Special care must be taken when handling a KA64A module.
Review Section 3.14 before replacing this module.

Example 3-8:

Replacing a Single Processor

$L2345€789 (123456789 (223456789 C1234567¢

]

€

BPL

BPD

”1-:-8

hi
22

ROM.
74F

e Vi.CC
Systen

ROMI

seria.

= VI

number

not

XBI D +

XBI

64 Mo

1.00/1.C1

beer

SN =

000C0COCIC

initialized

>>> RESTRE EEFROMD
7€E

EEPROM Revision

?7C

Tape

Proceed

i1mage

1.0071.C2

Rev:ision

with EEFROM update

?76A EEFROM

clanged

1.00,1.03%

>>>

successfully.

'opticral - may need latest conscle/diag patches agn.nm
>>>

PATCH

EEPROM

>>> BooTdD

3-42

ETF‘D

EEPROM »

has

NODE ¢

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0).

CAUTION: See Section 3.14 for KA64A module handling procedures.
Remove the defective processor module and temporarily insert it in an
unused XMI slot or place it on an ESD mat.
Remove the new processor module from the ESD box and insert it in
the XMI card cage. Place the old processor module in the ESD box.
Turn the lower key switch to Halt.
Turn the upper key switch to Enable.
Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the

TYP hine (usually in slot 1). See @ in Example 3-8.

If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both lines STF and ETF, it
passed self-test
Turn the lower key switch to Update.
Mount the TK cartridge containing the most recent saved image of the

!
old processor's EEPROM
10.

Issue the console command RESTORE EEPROM. See ®. The EEPROM

revision and tape image revision are displayed. and you are asked if you
wish to proceed with the EEPROM update.
11. If any patches had been issued since the last save

mount the TK

cartndge containing the patches See @®. 1f the FEPROM has already
been patched to the latest revision, go to step 14. For more information
about the PATCH command, see Section 3.18.

12. Issue the console command PATCH EEPROM. The patch operation
takes approximately 5 minutes.
13. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position.
14

Boot the operating system by issuing the BOOT command. See @.

When the svstem was onginally installed, customer service saved the EEPROM on a TK
cartndge (See VAX 6000-400 Installation Guide : The cartndge was left 1n the care of

the customer. Subsequently. the EEPROM might have been changed, then saved, several
times. Thire would normally be the case following a PATCH operation.
If vou do not have a tape, set the console terminal to 1200 baud, and then set the svstem
senal number 1n the new processor as follows:

>>>E5C ror [R5 [BE SET SYSTEM SERIAL FE5
Enter svstem senal number? aannnnnnnn [RET

UPDATE EEPROM? (Y or N1 >>> Y [T,

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-43

3.17 How to Replace the Boot Processor
The boot processor is indicated by the letter B on the selftest BPD line (slot 1 in Example 3-9). If they have the same
version ROMs, you can update the new processor’'s EEPROM
from one of the secondaries.
CAUTION: Special care must be taken when handling a KA64A module.

Review Section 3.15 before replacing this module.
Example 3-9:
$123456769
F

Replacing Boot Processor

012345€789

012345674

[

BPL

ETF‘?

BPD

XBI
D +

XBI
E +

ROMC

ROMI

32
.

EEPROM

...

1.00/1.00

NODE

'n’rgg

128Mb

£321234%¢”

>>> SET CFU'NIFFIMARY qu
>>>

SHOW

Current

CPrU

FPrimary:

/NJENAE FL~
/HOPRIMARY=~

>>> SET CPU 20
>>>

SHOW

Currert

CFU

Primary:

/NOENABLEL/NOPRIMARY~

>>> vppateE 1(®
1.

Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0).

CAUTION: See Section 3.15 for K/.64A module handling procedures.
2.

Remove the defective pr- cescor module and set it on a static pad.

344

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Remove the new processor module from the ESD box and insert it in
the XMI card cage. Place the old processor module in the ESD box.
Turn the lower key switch to Halt.

Turn the upper key switch to Enable.
Check the self-test display for the new processor, indicated by a P on

the TYP Line (usually in slot 1). See @ in Example 3-9.

If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both lines STF and ETF, it

passed self-test. See @.

You will see the following message:
750

System serial

number not

initialized

prinary processor

If you see the error message 752, the new module will not be able to
function as the boot processor. If you don't see this error message. go
to step 11.

10. Make the new module ineligible to be boot processor—use the console

command SET CPU/NOPRIMARY. See

The new processor will

operate as a secondarv processor without problems, but vou may
continue to see error messages ”2D, 7?52, and 754 when the system is
powered on or booted.
CAUTION: As long as its ROM is out of revision, do not issue the

command UPDATE to the new module. Issuing the UPDATE command
will disable the EEPROM.

Go to step 15.
11. Make one of the secondary processors the boot processor temporarily,

because the UPDATE command copies the boot processor's EEPROM.
Then ycu can update the new processor. This command immediately

makes the processor at node 2 the boot processor: SET CPU 2. See ®.
12. Turn the lower key switch to Update.

13. Now update the EEPROM of the new module from the temporary boot

processor, using the UPDATE command. See ®.

14, Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position.

15. Press the Restart button.

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-45

3.18 How to Add a New Processor or Replace a
Secondary Processor
Add a new secondary processor in a slot to the left of the
boot processor.
CAUTION: Special care must be taken when handling a KA64A module.
Revieuw Section 3.15 beture repiacing this module.
Example 3-10:
@12345€789
F

Adding or Replacing Secondary Processor

C123456789

[}

ROMC & V. .00

(0123456789

(1234567
¢

TYP

BFI

ETF

BPD

XBZI

XET

«+

}

1wV

128Mb

ROMI = V1 .07

€

EEFRCM e 1 Oifl,OOG)

]

NODE

SN = SG0i234F€”

>>> SET CFU/NIPFRIMAFY 3()
»>>

SHIW

CPU

Current

Primary:

/NIERAELED
-

/NCFRIMARY-

>>> vezate 3D

Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0.
CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the

cabinet when you handle any modules.
2.

Either remove the defective secondary processor module, or find an
empty slot where vou can add the new processor. If vou are removing
a defective module, temporarnily insert it in an unused slot.

346

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Remove the new processor module from the ESD box and insert it in
the XMI card cage. If you are replacing a processor module, place the
old module in the ESD box.
Turn the lower key switch to Halt and the uper key switch to Enable.

Check the self-test display for the new processor. indicated by a P on
the TYP line (in this example: slot 3). See © in Example 3~10.)
If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both lines STF and ETF, it

passed self-test. See ©.

If you see the error messages 72D and 752, the new module will not
be able to function as the boot processor. If you don’t see these error
messages, go to step 9.

Make the new module inel:zible to be boot processor—use the console

command SET CPU/NOPRIMARY. See ®.

The new processor will

overate as a secondary processor without problems, but you may
continue to see error messages 72D, 752, and ?54 when the system is
powered on or booted.

CAUTION: As long as its ROM is out of revision, do not issue the
command UPDATE to the new module Issuing the UPDATE command
will disable the EEPROM. Revision 1.0 and reuvision 2.0 ROMs are
incompatible. Kit #A2-01456-10 kas revision 2 ROMs and upgrading
procedures that need to be followed.
Go to step 13.

If vou see error messages ?2D and ?54. compare the EEPROM revision
numbers of the secondary processor and boot processor (second number
8 the EEPROM = XY field on the bottom line of self-test display). See
If the new secondary processor has a higher revision number than the

boot processor, PATCH the boot processor's EEPROM (see Section 3.18).
10. Turn the lower key switch to Update.
11.

Now update the EEPROM of the new module. See ®

12 Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position.

13. Press the Restart button.

KAB4A Scalar Processer

3-47

3.18 PATCH EEPROM Command
The PATCH EEPROM command is a console command used
by field service to update console and ROM diagnostics when
new revisions are issued.

Example 3-11:

PATCH EEPROM Command

»>>> SAVE EEPROMED

>>> FATICH EEPROP‘B
>>> UFDATE A.LLG
>>>

ITIL’.IZEO

$.2345676% C1234%€789 0123456789
F

01234567¢

ROMC = Vi .00

€

ETF

BELD

NODE

ETF

BED

TYp

E
+

XBI

)

XBI

128Mb

ROML = VI 00

EEPROM = Z.OC/Z‘C‘IQ

>>> savE EerroMD
>0

3-48

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

SN = 5G032345¢7

Load a tape cartridge into the TK70 drive and queue it to the beginning.
Save the current contents of the boot processor's EEPROM to tape

using the SAVE EEPROM command. See @ in Example 3~11. Mark

this tape for use only with this system. See Chapter 5 of the VAX
6000400 Owner’s Manual for more information on the SAVE EEPROM
command.
Halt all processors and enter console mode.
Load the new EEPROM patch tape into the TK tape drive.

Queue the tare to the beginning by pressing the load/unload
pushbutton. (See Appendix A of the VAX 6000400 Owner’s Manual
for details on using the TK tape drive.)

Enter the PATCH EEPROM command. See ®. Wait approximately 5

minutes for the patch to complete. You receive the console prompt back
when the patch is complete.

If the system is a muitiprocessor system, run UPDATE ALL to copy the

new patch information to the secondary processors. See ®. The time

-3

for UPDATE ALL to execute varies with the number of processors; the
operation takes approximately 4 minutes for each secondary processor.

Reset the system by pushing the Restart button on the control panel or

by entering the INITIALIZE command. See @.

Check the summary line of the self-test. The EEPROM information
indicates first the starting revision number of the EEPROM for this
svstem. followed by a slash. and the current revision number of the

EEPROM for the processors. See ©@.

If the revision numbers on all processors do not match. the system
prints out the most current revision number of the EEPROM data

and gives an error message indicating that the EEPROM code does
not match

(See Section 3.17.)

10. Sa veahe updated contents to tape. using the SAVE EEPROM command.

See

KAGB4A Scalai Processor

3-49

3.19 KAG4A Registers
The KAS84A registers consist of the processor status
longword, internal processor registers, KA64A registers in
XMI private space, XMI required registers, and 16 general
purpose registers.

Table 3-11:

KAG4A Internal Prccessor Registers

Mpemonic

Address

Type

Class

Kerne) Stack Pointer

KSp

IPRO

R'W

Ezecutive Stack Painter

ESP

IPR1

Supervisor Stack Pointer

SSP

IPR2

Ueer Stack Pointer

USP

IPR3

Interrupt Stack Pointer

ISP

IPR4

Reserved

I[PR5-IPR?

PO Base

POBR

IPRS

PO Length

POLR

IPR9

P1 Base

P1BR

[PR10

R'W

P1 Length

P1LR

[PR11

Kex tn Types:
R-Read
W-Wnte
RW-Read write

Key to Classes:

1-Implemented by the KA64A (as specified in the VAX Archutecture Reference Man.
ual).

2-Implemented uniquely by the KAG4A
3-Not implemented Read as zero; NOP on write.

4-Access not allowed; accesses result 1n & reserved operand fault.

5-Accessible, but not fully implemented. accesses nield UNPREDICTABLE results.
6~lmplemented by the FV64A vector module.

[-The regster 15 1mtialized on KAG4A reset (power-up., system reset, and node reset).

3-50

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

Table 3-11 (Cont.):

KAG64A Internal Processor Registers

Mnemonic

Address

Type

Class

Svsters Base

SBR

IPR12

System Length

SLR

IPR13

Reserved

[PR14-TPR15

Process Control Block Base

PCBB

IPR16

Svstem Control Block Base

SCBB

IPR17

Interrupt Pnonty Leve!

IPL

IPR18

R'W

AST Level

ASTLVL

[PR19

R'W

Software Interrupt Request

SIRR

PR20

Software Interrupt Summary

SISR

IPR21

Reserved
Interval Counter Control and

Status

PR22-TPR23
ICCS

Reserved

IPR24

3
R'W

IPR25-IPR26

Time-of-Year Clock

TODR

IPR27

Console Storage Receiver Status

CSRS

IPR28

Console Storage Receiver Data

CSRD

IPR29

Console Storage Transmitter Status

CSTS

IPR30

Console Storage Transmitter Data

CSTD

[PR31

Consnle Receiwver Control‘Status

RXCS

IPR32

Console Recerver Data Buffer

RXDB

[PR33

Console Transmtter Control'Status

TXCS

[PR34

R'W

Console Transmitter Data Buffer

TXDB

[PR35

Reserved
Mactune Check Error Summary

[PR36-IPR37
MCESR

Reserved
Accelerator Contro} and Status

IPR39
ACCS

Reserved
Console Saved PC

[PR38

IPR40

3
R'W

IPR41
SAVPC

IPR42

3
R

KAG4A Scalar Processor

3-51

Table 3-11 (Cont.):

KAG4A Internal Processor Registers

Mnpemonic

Address

Type

Class

Censole Saved PSL

SAVPSL

IPR43

Reserved

IPR44-TPR46

Translation Buffer Tag

TBTAG

Reserved

IPR47

3
w

IPR48-TPR54

2
3

1/O Reset

IORESET

IPR55

Memory Mansgement Enable

MAPEN

IPR56

Translat:oc Buffer Invahdate

TBIA

IPR57

TBIS

IPR58

TBDATA

IPR59

All

Translation Buffer Invahdate
Single

Translation Buffer Data

Reserved

[PR60-IPR61

Svetem ldentification

SID

IPR62

Translatior. Buffer Check

TBCHK

IPR63

Reserved

[PR64-IPR1I

Backup Cache Reserved

BC112

IPR112

Backup Cache Tag Siore

BCBTS

[PR113

Backup Cache P! Tag Store

BCP1TS

IPR114

Backup Cache P2 Tag Store

BCP2TS

IPR115

Backup Cache Refresh

BCRFR

IPR116

Backup Cache Index

BCIDX

IPR117

Backup Cache Status

BCSTS

IPR118

R'W

Backup Cache Control

BCCTL

TPR119

R'W

Backup Cache Error

BCERR

IPR120

Backup Cache Flush Backup Tag Swore

BCFBTS

IPR121

Backup

BCFPTS

IPR122

Cache

Flush

Pnmary

Tag

Store

Reserved

IPR123

Vector Interface Error Statue

3-52

VINTSR

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

IPR123

2
RW

Table 3-11 (Cont.):

KAG64A Intermal Processor Registers

Mpemonic

Addrese

Type

Class

Primary Cache Tag Store

PCTAG

IPR124

R'W

Primary Ceche Index

PCIDX

IPR125

R'W

Prnmary Cache Error Address

PCERR

IPR126

Pnumarv Cache Status

PCSTS

IPR127

R'W

Reserved

IPR126-IPR143

Vector Processor Status

VPSR

IPR144

R'W

Vector Anthmetic Exception

VAER

IPR145

Vector Memorv Activity Check

VMAC

IPR146

Vector Translation Buffer

VTBIA

IPR147

Invahdate All

Reserved

IPR145-IPR156

Vector Indirect Register Address

V1ADR

IPR157

Vector Indirect Data Low

VIDLO

IPR158

Vector Indirect Data High

VIDHI

IPR159

The IPRs are expliaitly accessible to software only by the Move To Processor
Register (MTPR) and Move From Processor Register (MFPR) instructions,
which require kernel mode pnvileges From the console. EXAMINE/ and
DEPOSIT1 commands read and wrnte the IPRs.

Table 3-12:

XMi Registers for the KAG4A

Mnemonic

Address

XMI Device

XDEV

BB + 00

XMI Bus Error

XBER

BB + 04

XMI Faihing Address

XFADR

BB + 08

XM! GPR

XGPR

BB + 0C

KRAB4A Control and Status

RCSR

BB + 10

Note: "BB" = base address of an XMI node, which is the address of the
first location 1in nodespace.

KAB4A Scalar Processor

3-53

Table 3-13:

KAGE4A Registers in XMI Private Space

Mnemonic

Address

Control Reqister Write Enable

CREGWE

2000 0000

Console ROM (halt protected)

2004 0000 to 2007 FFFF

Console EEPROM (hait protected)

2008 0000 to 2008 7FFF

Conaocle ROM (not halt protected)

200C 0000 to 200F FFFF

Conscle EEPROM (not halt

2010 0000 to 2010 7FFF

protected)

RSSC Baee Address

SSCBAR

2014 0000

RSSC Configuration

SSCCNR

2014 0010

RSSC Bus Timeocut Contrui

SSCBTR

2014 0020

RSSC Output Port

OPORT

2014 0030

RSSC Input Port

[PORT

2014 0040

Control Register Base Address

CRBADR

2014 0130

Control Register Address Decode Mask

CRADMR

2014 0134

EEPROM Base Addrecs

EEBADR

2014 0140

EEPROM Addrees Decode Mask

EEADMR

2014 0144

Tumer 0 Control

TCRO

2014 0160

Timer 0 Interval

TIRO

2014 0164

Timer G Next Interval

TNIRO

2014 0168

Tumer 0 Interrupt Vector

TIVRO

2014 016C

Timer 1 Control

TCR1

2014 0170

Tumer 1 Interval

TIR1

2014 0174

Tumer 1 Next Interval

TNIR1

2014 0178

Tuner 1 Interrupt Vector

TIVR1

2014 017C

RSSC Interval Counter

SSCICR

2014 01F8

RSSC Internal RAM

2014 0400 to 2014 O7FF

IP IVINTR Generation

IPINTR

2101 0000 to 2101 FFFF

WE IVINTR Generation

WEINTR

2102 0000 t0 2102 FFFF

3-54

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

$8008.00 0008080898000868080008408080060000006¢090¢0.84

h0.0.0000.0.0090008900
8000080006 0008¢¢00006600.90004¢24¢4

PO 00900600000 000060 08080808008 00800900866.¢408044
fo 00000000008 000 8000840080¢0006040006406000¢4804
b 006900000000 00000008690800464646¢¢000460000.0484

$0.0.0.0.9060.60086900 0808000000685 00808080044/
b 9.9.0000 89000000009000000000000060060804¢
D0.6.09.090.09.0$0006000668094+860009906999094

} 0800000890008 80.080808090800000844064
p o808 000000000008 000808048009688401
$:0.0.9.¢.8.0.0.40.005098006¢84800080¢0¢044

XA XOOOONDO
XX XX IO XX XK XAXAX

30O0OONONCONOOI
X XX XX XK X
XXX AXXAKAOOCXKNOOOO
XK I
0.9.0.9.000808080006000044¢3
XXX OOOCOOGOOOOONIN
X
p 9809080000080 9066494
KUK
KX XA X
b0.6.0.40.0.64.06,090903

b#.9.0.9.9.00.¢.0.69¢9
.0.9.4.4.4.6.¢.9.0.
7

OO0
D.0.8.9.4.0.¢4
XXX
XXX
X

XAXXX
XXAXXXX

XUXXXAXAX
}.0.0.0.0.0. 4,640 ¢4
XAXAXXXAAXX
XXX

1,0.9.4.0.4.8.0.0.6.0.64¢084

$0.0.0.8.080600880400
XXOCOOOCO000OIXX
X
P0.0.0.6.6.0.0.606/0¢00.96840464

§0.9.0.0.0.0600608¢4569.46¢8404
F.9.0.0.0.0.0.0606.000600100080684¢1
§9.9.008.8.00.09.0608 0009060808448 4
AKX XXX
XX XX XX KA XK

XA XAXK XA KK XA KOOI XU XX KX XAX
P8 8.5.0.40.000050.6008080606808068¢00¢44

b 0900004000 000.060060064000000408¢4¢

O 00.00.06640 00000000090 003600640000049
b0 80000090609 0008088008000800000009080¢4
)0.6.0.0000004060006800800608086006000800098¢4
}0.6.0.0.6.0000000.0900080
40080000004 ¢404000.4494004

009690600000
865 0909 00806¢9.009.00000408064808604
}9.9.0.0.0.0.08.6.9.6540064909¢0090900.0000000885080804
44
$0.8.0.0.0.0.¢.00.6.9.0.60000808¢96$08690668000.$00590685.09904
1 0.0.0.8.00.0.000.0 0008808008060006680908000.6060004060904404

Chapter 4

FV64A Vector Processor
This chapter contains the following sections:

FV64A Physical Description and Specifications

KA64A/FV64A Coprocessors

FV64A Configuration Rules

Functional Description

Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED

Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register

Vector Processor Tests—RBD 0 and RBD 1

VAX'DS Diagnostics

Machine Checks

Vector Console Commands

FV64A Handling Procedures

How to Replace a Vector Module

Vector Processor Registers

FVG64A Vector Processor

4-—1

4.1 FV64A Physical Description and Specifications
The FV64A is a vector processor used with the KA64A
scalar processor. The module designation is T2017. The
two processor modules are connected with a VIB cable.

Figure 4-1 shows side 1 of the module, and Figure 4-2 shows
side 2.

Figure 4-1:

FV64A Module (Side 1)
CACHE
TAG

CACHE CONTROL AND

CACHE ADDRESS BUFFERS

LOAD'STORE

STORE

CHIP

Bt 2

E! —IFT—‘ ]]HJ
1

h Nulninls!

ql f

SELFTEST

STORE

_~ CORNER

S0 0000*[]o} ] |

fl “ H

OSCILLATOR

DUPLICATE
TAG

Is s APy,

i
L ;!

| == :}

(————

—

:‘1

‘-ED\F'%
D?‘T\Q»,L.—JM s'
T

]! zF
CONNECTOR

VvIB

[

e R S

!um- i e

CDBUS .-

—

‘

CACHE

| SEGMENTS

comecton | | | =
U

RER

INTERFACE

‘

L]
q

FAVOR3

VERSE2

VERSE1

VERSE 0

CLOCK

VECTL

CHIP

,
+3 3V REGULATOR

meb-0310-89

4-2

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Because the vector module has components on side 2,
only memory modules can be installed next to side 2 (see
Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2:

FV64A Module (Side 2)

XMi

DUPLICATE

CACHE

STORE

TAG

CORNER

TAG

CACHE CONTROL AND

CACHE ADDRESS BUFFERS

K [3‘ ann a7
]
fi ii D—] DDDD|e
S
zF

[T/

SEGMENTS

;l bt

CONNECTOR . | 11+

EEPROM

h
fi: —1’”‘"’“’ 3

5’":3:

I___

&:”m?m‘:_’_wj

]

)

mooute | L4| -

REVISON

—

FAVOR 0

FAVOE 1

FAVOR 2

> CONNECTOR

._______,\\\5.' CDBUS
‘

CACHE

INTERFACE

T
VERSE 3

e0-0220-09

FV64A Vector Processor

4-3

4.2 KAS4A/FV64A Coprocessors
The VAX 6000-400 uses a high-speed system bus, called the
XMI bus, to interconnect its processors and its memory
modules. In Figure 4-3 all VO devices connect to the VAXBI
bus. The VAX 6000-400 supports multiprocessing with up to
six scalar processors or one or two scalar/vector pairs.

Figure 4-3:

VAX 6000-400 Vector Processing System

MEMORY

MEMORY
Lovie

MEMORY

VECTOR
CPU

SCALAR
CPU

e
VECTOR
CPU

VIB

SCALAR
CcPU

DWMBA
1'C
INTERFACE

NOTE: Installution

meb0526-9C

of an

FV64A

vector processor

requires

that

the

attached KA64A module (T2015) be at a minimum revision of K. In
addition,

the ROMs on any additional KA64A modules must be at a

minimum revision of V2.0 (ROM 0 and ROM 1).

4-4

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

Table 4-1:

FV64A Specitications

Parameter

Description

Module Number:

T2017

Dimensions:

233em 92" Hzx06cm (025" Wx 280cm (11.0°D

Temperature:

Storage Range
Operating Range

-40°C 1o 66°C (-40°F to 151°F)
5°C to 50°C (41°F w 122°F,

Relative Humidity:

Storage

10% to 95% noncondensing

Operating

10% to 95% nonconder sing

Altitude:

Storage

Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft)

Operaung

Up t0 2.4 kmn (8000 f1)

Current:

14A at +5V

0.20A at +5VBB

Power:

70W

Cables:

V1B cable, 17-02240-03

Diagr »stics:

ROM-based diagnostics 0 and 1.
VAX'DS diagnostics. see Section 4.8.

The FV'64A vector processor is an integrated vector processor; that is, the
vector processor module performs as a coprocessor that is tightly coupled

with a host scalar processor. The two processors are physically connected
by an intermodule cable. the VIB. The scalar processor is specifically
designed to support its vector coprocessor, and the vector instruction set is
implemented as part of the host native instruction set. Both the scalar and
vector processors are on the XMI bus, and they share a common memory.

A VAX 6000 Model 409 system can have one or two scalar/vector pairs.
If the system has only one pair, it can also have additional scalar
processors. For optimal performance. two memory modules are required
for one scalar/vector pair, and four memory modules are required for two
scalar/vector pairs.

FV64A Vector Processor

4-8

4.3 FV644. Configuration Rules
A vector processor must be installed to the left of its
companion scalar processor. An intermodule cable connects
the two modules. A memory module or an empty slot must be
to the left of the vector processor. Any other configuration
may damage the vector module.

Figure 4—4:

Scalar/Vector Contigurations

i
i

MVPMVP

MVPPP P

TWO SCALARVECTOR PAIRS

ONE SCALARVECTOR PAIR

SLOT1

SLOT ¢

KEY
M= MEMORY

V= VEZTOR PROCESSOR
P « SCALAR PROCESSOR
msb-0373-9C

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 4-2 shows the maximum number of scalar and vector processors
supported in a VAX 6000 system.

Table 4-2:
Maximum
CPUs

Processor M_o_dule Combinations
Maximum
Vectors

Configuration
(Slot 1 at Right)

PPPPPP

MVPPPP

MVPMVP

Figure 4—4 shows system configurations for a VAX 6000 Model 400 system
with one or two vector processors. The diagram on the left indicates the
configuration for two scalar/vector pairs (V- -P) with a memory module in
the slot to the left of the vector processor. The diagram on the right shows
a single scalar/vector pair with additional scalar processors.

Typically, processors are placed in the right XMI slots, beginning with slot 1
and extending to slot 6. Memories are placed in the middle slots. from slot
A to slot 5 and then slots B and C, and \ AXBI adapters are installed in the
left side of the card cage, beginning with slot E. However, in a system with
a vector processor, the modules should be installed as shown in Figure 44.
These configurations must be followed to avoid damage to the modules and
for performance reasons:
*

Because the FV64A module has VLS] components with heat sinks
protruding from both sides, only a memory module, with its low
components. can be placed next to side 2 of the FV64A.

In a system with one scalar/vector pair and one or more additional
scalar processors, the scalar processor of the pair should be prevented
from being the boot processor for performance reasons.
If the scalar/vector pair is to the left of other scalar processors, then the
processor of the scalar/vector pair will not become the boot processor
unless other processors fail self-test or have been disabled with the
SET CPU console command. Alternatively, you can issue the SET
CPU/NOPRIMARY command and give the node number of the attached
scalar processor that you do not want to be the boot processor.

FV64A Vector Processor

4-7

4.4 Functional Description
Figure 4-5 shows the three main functional units of the
FV64A processor: the vector control unit, the arithmetic
unit, and the load/store unit, which includes the XMI
interface and cache control.

Figure 4-5:

To Scale

FV64A Block Diagram

30°

JR CONTROL UNIT
)

VECTL Chip

Cable

Cache Data Bus
(CD Bus;

ARITHMETIC UNIT

‘
I

Load'Stwore Chup

File Chips

l
I
1

i 0

Vector

LOAD’S{TORE UNTT

Cache and XM! interface

(Verse.

F:L%‘zps
-

(Favor\

XM! Bus
msb-0527.80

4-8

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The FV64A is an integrated vector processor, tightly coupled to the KA64A
scalar processor.
The vector instructions are issued from the scalar
processor, and the vector processor then dispatches them internally. All
communication between the scalar and vector modules takes place across
the intermodule VIB cable. All communication with memory is over the
XMI bus.
The vector processor has 16 vector data registers, each 64 quadwords long.
There is a 1-megabyte direct-mapped cache and a 136-entry translation
buffer.
The FV64A is an XMI module with the standard XMI Corner. The module
has a cabie connector at the rear edge of the module that connects to the
rear edge of a KA64A module. The instructions are issued over the VIB
bus and pass to the VECTL chip, which then controls the operations on
the module. It passes instructions to the load/store unit over the CD bus.
The load/store unit then issues XMl memory transactions. The VECTL

chip also issues instructions to the four pairs of Verse and Favor chips that
make up the arithmetic unit. The vector data registers are in the Verse
chips. The Favor chips perform the arithmetic operations on the data held
in the Verse chips.
The vector processor module uses the standard XM!I Corner interface, but it
functions only as an XMI commander. The vector processor does not issue
transactions to /O space, nor does it respond to XMI transactions directed

to it. All error reporting is done by the scalar processor.

A Vector Processor

4-9

4.5 Self-Test Results: Consoie Display and
Self-Test LED
You can check the vector processor self-test results in three
ways: the self-test display if the vector is attached to
the processor in node 1, the yellow self-test LED on the
FV64A module, and the contents of the XGPR register of the
attached KA64A module. If self-test passes, the large vellow
LED on the vector module lights. If the vector module fails
self-test, the light remains unlit.

Example 4-1:

Self-Test Results

$.23456769 01234%€789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 ¢ “

NODE

BPD

D +
XBI

XBI
E +

L28Mc

EEPROM = 2 C0/2.00

TYP

BROML = V2 CC

)

4
ta

ROMD & V2 007

o +w

€

MWy
A

M+

O +0 4+

SN = SGC12345€70

Example 4~1 shows the seli-test results for a system with two scalar/vector
pairs. Each KA64A runs its self-test and then tests any attacked vector
Processor.

@ The first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line
shows the self-test progress of the KA64A in node 1 {the baud rate
must be at least 1200). The numbers correspond to tests in the system
self-test. If there is an attached vector processor module and self-test

passes, the line prints as in Example 4-1 ending with #. If there is no
attached vector processor, testing stops after the first 37 tests. If a test
fails, the failing test number is the last one prninted. For example, if
test 14 fails, the line is printed as follows:
$12345€7€9

4-10

(1234

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

@ This line indicates the type (TYP) of module at each XMI node. Scalar
processors are type P. and vector processors are type V. The dashes
indicate that the scalar processors are attached to the adjacent vector

Processors.

This line shows self-test fail status (STF), which are the results of onboard self-test. Possible values for processors are:
+ (pass)

- (fail)

All processors passed self-test in this example. !
The BPD line indicates boot processor designation and whether vector
processors are enabled or disabled. When the system completes onboard self-test. the scalar processor with the lowest XMl ID number
that passes self-test and is eligible is selected as boot processor — 1n
this example, the processor at node 1.

The results on the BPD line indicate:
¢

The boot processor (B)

Scalar processors eligible (E' or ineligible (D) to become the boot
processor

Vector processors enabled (E) or disabled (D)

In this example the vector processor attached to the scalar processor
at node 4 has been disabled. A vector processor can be disabled by the
SET CPU/NOVECTOR_ENABLED command.
During extended test (ETF) all processors run additional tests, which
include reading and writing memory and using the cache. On line ETF,
results are reported for each processor in the same way as on line STF—

a plus sign indicates that extended test passed and a minus sign that
extended test failed.
Another BPD hne is displaved, because it is possible for a different CPU
to be designated boot processor if the processor first designated as the
boot processor fails the extended testing.
The last line of the self-test display shows the ROM and EEPROM
version numbers and the system serial number. Version 2 or greater
ROMs and EEPROMs are required to support vector processors.

If a remimon J scalar processor has an attached vector module, the vector will be disabled,
and this error message 16 displaved. ?7D Vector module 18 disabled—check KA64A revision
&t node n. The aftached scalar module (T2015+ must be at 8 mimmum revision of K In
addition, the ROMs on any other KA64A modules must be at 8 mimmum revision of V2 0.

FV64A Vector Processor

é4~11

4.6 Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register
You can check self-test results in the self-test display or
in the XGPR register. The failing test number is left in
the upper byte of the XGPR register of the failing KA64A
Processor.

Figure 4-6:

XGPR Register

; ! ! l

——

i— YVYector Node ID

t————————

Failing Test

Example 4-2:
>»>> E'P

Reserved

Vectcr

Erabled

Vector

Ertended

Vector

Self-Test

Vector

Present

meb-p371-9C

XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure

L 218B(CCCC

Examine the

4QS5FCaxdoi

regi.ster

The

longwcrd at

the

address

physical

cf the processcr

result

se.f-test

4-12

Failed

Falled

Number

2188007C,
21BB0OCOC

Test

indicates that
fa.led

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

address

the XGPR

in slot

test

(Load Store Cache

test).

Figure 46 shows the XGPR register of the scalar processor. Bit <23>, when
set. indicates that there is a vector processor attached to this processor. Bits
<22:16> give status on an attached vector processor.
The failing test number is derived from the upper byte (bits <31:24>) of the
longword returned. For seli-test, the upper byte contains the failing test
number. If CPU/memory interaction test fails, this byte contains the failing
test number plus 49. If DWMBA test fails, bit <31> is set (making the first
digit 8 through A), and bits <30:24> contain the failing test number. All
numbers are expressed 1n binary-coded decimal (BCD). See Table 4-3.
As shown in Example 4-2, vou can examine the XGPR register of the failing
node to determine the failing test number See Table 3-3 to determine
the base address (BB) of the KA64A processor’s node. Then calculate the
address of the XGPR register by adding 0C (hex) to the base address.

Table 4-3:

Interpreting XGPR Falling Test Numbers
XGPR «30:24>

Test

Clear

149

CPU'memory interaction test

Clear

50-66

1-17

Additional memory

Clear

67-73

DWMBA test

Set

126

1-26

Failing Diagnostic

XGPR <31>

Self-test

(BCD)

Numbers

FV64A Vector Processor

4-13

4.7 Vector Processor Tests—RBD 0 and RBD 1
T0038 through T0049 of RBD 0 test the vector processor
during self-test
Tests 14-17 of RBD 1 test the vector
processor during CPU/memory testing.

Example 4-3:

Running RBD 0 on a Secondary Processor with an
Attached Vector Processor

>>> se7 cpv 4 @
>>»>

T/R

RBD4> ST(,/TK 9
2.00

;XPP/V_ST

,
;

TOOCI
TOCI1

TGCGZ
TCCl1ZI

TOOC3
TOC13

TOOG4
TOCI4

TOOOS
TOGLS

T0006
TOC16

TOOC?
TOOL7

TOOCE
TOLIB

TOCOS
TOCI9

TOCIO
TO328

;
,

TOGZ1
TO031

TCOZD
TOC22

TO0Z3
TIC33

TO0Z4
TOC34

TOO25
TOC3S

TOC26
TOC36

TO027
TO037

TOC28
TO038

TO029
TOC3S

TOO3C
TOO4C

;

TD041

TCU4Z

TOL42

TOG44

TOO4S

TOUAE

TOG4AT

TCO48

TCO049

2
0060000C

€

P
;
;0000000C

8082
0CC0000C

0G00CO0C

00GH0000C

00000000 00000000

In Example 4-3:

€@

This command causes the KA64A module at node 4 to become the
primary processor.

@ The prompt 1indicates that the CPU at node 4 is the pnmary processor.
RBD 0 1s run on the scalar/vector processor pair at node 4.

4-14

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 4-4:

Vector Processor Tests Iin Self-Test—RBD 0

Teat

Function

T0038

VECTL Regsters Test

T0039

Verse Registers Test

T0040

Load'Store Registers Test

T0041

VIB Error Logac Test

T0042

Other VECTL Chup Logac Test

T0043

Verse and Favor Test

TO044

Load'Swore Translation Buffer and CAM Test

To045

Load'Store Cache Test

T0046

Load'Store Instruction Test

T0047

Load Store Tag and Duplicate Tag Test

T004E

Load'Store Error Cases Test

T0049

Module Critical Path Test

Table 4-5:

Vector

Tests

CPU/Memory

Interaction

Tests—

RBD 1
Test

Function

T0014

Cache Test

To015

Wnite Buffer Test

T0016

Duphicate Tag Test

To017

Miscellaneous Error Test

FV64A Vector Processor

4-15

4.8 VAX/DS Diagnostics
The FV64A software diagnostics that run under the VAX
Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) are listed in Table 4-6.
Example 44 lists VAX/DS commands used in testing vector
processors. See Section 2.4 for instructions on running the
supervisor.

Table 4-6:

FVG64A VAX/DS Diagnostics

Program

Description

ERKMP

Multiprocegsor Exerciser
{2 min—quick?
(4 min—default)

VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 1

EVKAG

{1 1/2 min—quzck)
(16 mun——default})

EVKAH

VAX Vector Instruction Ezerciser, Part 2
{1 myn——quicki
(18 min—default)

Example 4-4:
DE>»

RUN

VAX'DS Commands for Testing Vector Processors

ERKMP

Multiprocesscr Exerciser
VesiCI

LS>

QUICK

SET

Abbreviated version
KAL

Instruction

Exerciser

Remcves

second

DS>

TESELETT

DE>

RUN

EVKAS

Fart

DS>

RUN

EVKARH

Part

also

tests

processors.

the

the VAX Vectcr
w:ll

rur.

sca.ar/vector pair

from testing.

BOOT

DE>

EXIT

4-16

KAl

SELECT

KAC

Ds>
Ds>

scalar

DESELETT

the boct

BOCT

DS>

Restore

VAX Vector

Instruction Exerciser.

mcre than one vecteor, make the other
of the second scalar/vector pair
the

processor.

Rurn EVKAG

and EVKAH

aecond vector.

original boot

processor.

VAX 6000-40C Options and Maintenance

4.9 Machine Checks
A machine check is an exception tha. indicates a processordetected internal error. Figure 4-7 and Table 4-7 ghow these
parameters. The FV64A machine check parse tree appears
in Appendix E along with parse trees for hard and soft error
interrupts and disable faults.

Figure 4-7:

The Stack in Response to a Machine Check

BYTE COUNT

MACHINE CHECK CODE

SP+4

VIRTUAL ADDRESS

SP+8

VIRTUAL INSTRUCTION BUFFER ADDRESS

SP.C

INTERRUPT STATE

SP+10

INTERNAL STATE

SP.14

INTERNAL REGISTER

SP.18

PROGRAM COUNTER

SP+1C

PROCESSOR STATUS LONGWORD

SP.20
mean-0180R
-89

Table 4-7:

FV64A Machine Check Parameters

Parameter
Machine check code

Value

(hex)

Description

Vector module error

(SP+4)

Machine checks are taken regardless of the current IPL. If the machine
check exception vector bits (<1:0>) are not both one, the operation of the
processor is undefined. The exception is taken on the interrupt stack and
the IPL is raised to 1F (hex). See Table 3-9 for the complete list of machine
check codes.

FV64A Vector Processor

4-17

4.10 Vector Console Commands
Table 3-10 gives the console commands spccific to the vector
Processor.

Table 4-8:

Vector Console Commands

Command

Functiop

DEPOSIT

Stores

data

epecified

sddress.

Additional

ad-

dresses can be VMR, VCR. and VLR (for Vector Mask Regimter, Vector Count Register, and Vector Length Register.

Defines the address space ar a vector indirect register. accesses addresses 400 and higher.

Quadword 18 the default data mze for vector registers (except for VCR and VLR

\VE

Defines the address space as the vector register set.

EXAMINE

Displave the contents of a specified address.

Additional ad-

dresses cap be VMR, VCR, and VLR (for Vector Mask Reg18ter, Vector Count Regster. and Vector Length Register:

Defines the address epace as a vector indirect register, ac-

cesses addresses 400 and higher.

Quadword 18 the default data mze for vector registers (ex-

Defines the address space as the vector register set.

cept for VCR and VLR,

Specifies attrnbutes of processors. such as ebgibihity to be
come the boot processor or whether a vector processor 1 enabled.

SET CPU

NOVECTOR_ENABLED

Prevents a vector module from being recognized in the system configuration.

VECTOR_ENABLED

Specifier that a vector module will be recognized in the system configuration, the default.

4-18

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

DEPOSIT Examples
1

>>>

DEPOSIT/VE V12

DEPOSIT V6

2C¢:/n:2

Deposits

element

>>>

DEPOSIT/¢/P

200

into all

zerc
2C

intc Vé

(hex)

elementes

Vig.

and

beginning at
alec

in the

elemsnts.

two

>>> DEPOSIT VIR 1

gzero

vector

Deposits one

in the Vector

Length

FFFFFFFF45370201

Deposits

data

FFFFFFFF4537C201,
into

physical

& quadword

memory

address

'2aG.

>>»>

DEPOSIT/M

440

Deposits

zeros

with

vector

address

440

indirect
(hex).

FV64A Vector Processor

4-19

EXAMINE Examples
1

>>>

EXAMINE

Examines

VLR

the

Vector length

Regieter.

M 00000001

>>> EXAMINE/Q’P

Examines the gquadwerd in

200

physical memory at

>>>

EXAMINE/VE

Examines element

V12.2E

(whaich

M 44l

4-20

440

FEFFFFFF

00000C0C

EXAMINE
‘M

regaster

Examines

>>>

the

/M is used to
indirect

vector

Viz.

vector

hex

indirect

address

access

registers.

VAX 6000400 Options and Mainter.ance

200.

(hex)

decimal)

data

address

44C.

vector

EXRMINE/VE VO

Examines

vector

displays

all

'700: 00

0000000C

00000002

vQ0:02

00000000

0000QO02

vao:04

00000000

00000002

vOoU

020000C0

00000002

voG:0s

00000040

00000002

voC:OA

00007000

00000002

v0o0:0C

00000000

00000002

V00:0E

00000000

000C00002

v00:10

00000000

00000002

voc:12

00000000

00000002

v0¢:14

00000000

00000002

v0oC:16

00000000

00000002

voc:18

00000000

00000002

voC.la

00000000

00000002

Vo0 :2C

0000C00C

00000002

VOO:1E

00000000

00000002

v0C:20

00000000

00000002

v00:22

0000000C

00000002

Vv00:24

000000CC

00000002

v0oCc:26

0000000C

00000002

voC:28

000000CC

00000002

VOl :2K

00000000

00000032

vor:2Cc

00000COC

00000002

VOC:2E

0000C0O0C

00000002

V00:30

0000000C

00000002

v0C:32

0C000000

00000002

v0G:34

00000C0C

00000002

v0C:36

0000000C

00000002

vGeC:38

00000000

00000002

VOO .3a

00000020

00002002

voC:3C

0000000C

00000002

VOC.3E

00000000

00000022

VO,

64 elements

system
regaister VO.

v00:01

00000000

00000002

v00:03

00000000

00000002

v00:05

00000000

0D0OOOO02

v00:07

00000000

00000002

v00:09

00000000

000000C2

v0o0:0B

00000000

00000002

SEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEE

>>>

SRR EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

vo0:0D

00000000

00000002

VO0O:0F

00000000

00000002

v00:11

00000000

000000C2

v00:13

00000000

00000002

v00:15

00000000

000000C2

v00:17

00000000

0000000C2

v00.19

00000000

00000002

voC:1B

00C00000

00OOOOCZ

voeo:1D

00000000

000000C2

VvOO:1F

00000000

00000002

v00:21

00000000

00000002

v00:23

00000000

00000002

v00:25

00000000

00000002

v00:27

00000000

00000O0C2

v00:29

00000000

00000002

veo:2B

00000000

00000002

v00:2Dp

00000000

00000OC2

VOC:2F

00000000

000000C2

v00:31

00000000

0QOOOOC2

v00:33

00000000

000000CZ

v00:35

00000000

000Q00QC2

v00:37

00000000

00000002

v00:39

00000000

000000CZ

v00:3B

00000000

0O0OOOOC2

voC:3p

00000000

00OGOOC2

v00:3F

0000000C

000000C2

FV64A Vector Processor

4-21

4.11 FV64A Handling Prccedures
Handle the processor modules with care.

The CMOS2
technology used on the iater 6000 series modules is more
vulnerable to static than past technology.
Also, these
modules have 25 mil leads t» the chips; these leads are very
small, close together, and easily bent.

Figure 4-8:

Holding the FV64A Module

;

000 =

=
D

Azm==00

=3
L

[BEEnh

4-22

msb-0228A-90

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The later 6000 series modules require careful handling. Prepare vourself
and the work area before handling these modules. Roll up your sleeves
and remove any jewelry. Figure 4~8 shows the proper way to hold these
modules.

Follow these handling procedures to avoid damaging the processor modules:
1

Always wear an antistatic wrist strap.

Before removing the module from its ESD box, place the box on a clean,
stable surface.

Be sure the box will not slide or fall. Never place the box on the floor.

And be sure no tools, papers, manuals, or anything else that might
damage the module is near it. Some components on this module cay «
be damaged by a 600-volt static charge; paper, for example. can -arry
a charge of 1000 volts.

Hold the module only by the edges, as shown in Figure 4-8.
Do not hold the module so that your fingers touch any 25 mil devices,
leads. or XMl fingers. Be sure you do not bend the module as you are
holding it.
Be sure nothing touches the module surface or any of its components.

If anything touches the module, components or leads can be damaged.

This includes the antistatic wrist strap, clothing, jewelry, cables,
components on other modules, and anything in the work area (such
as tools, manuals, or loose papers..

FV64A Vector Processor

4-23

-0l

1.0

Inserting the FV64A Module in an XMI Card Cage

S Uaad

Figure 4-9:

med-037¢-80

4-24

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

You must take special precautions when moving the processor modules in
or out of the XMI card cage.
Be sure, when inserting the module in or removing it from the XMI
card cage, that no part of the module comes in contact with another
module or a cable. The leads on the components are fragile and can be
damaged by contact with fingers or any surface.
When vou swap out a module, place it in the correct ESD box before
you install the new module.

Hold the XMI card cage handle while removing or inserting the module.
If it is not held in place, the handle can spring down and damage the
module.

When 1inserting the module in the card cage. grasp it as shown in
Figure 4-9, being careful not to touch any 25 mil devices, and slide
it slowly and gently into the slot.
Do not attach the repair tag to the module.

Place the repair tag in the plastic bag attached to the bottom of the
ESD box. Allowing the repair tag to come in contact with the module
can cause damage to a component.

FVB4A Vector Processor

4-25

4.12 How to Replace a Vector Module
If a vector module is defective, you can replace it with a
new one. If you install an additional one, see the complete
installation instructions in the VAX 6000 Series Upgrade
Manual

Figure 4-10:

Replacing a Vector Module In an XMI Card Cage

®
e, = -—I1
i ‘11*'7*'3*-—?'}_--‘ 17——ng1
-—j"‘P

[0y

‘

3 ,7\\\7,Y
207

—

- -

]

(S~

CT——
-—

mso-0407-8C

4-26

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

CAUTION: Special care must be taken when handling processor modules.
See Section 4.11 before replacing this module. Also review the configuration
rules in Section 4.3.

While remouing or inserting a module in the XMI card cage, you must hold
the XMI card cage lever. Failure to dc so may result in damage to the
module.

Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0).

Open the cabinet door and remove the plastic door in front of the XMI

card cage.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.

Disconnect the VIB cable (17-02240-03) from the vector module.
Remove the defective vector processor module.

Take the new vector processor module from the ESD box and insert it
in the XMI card cage. Place the defective module in the ESD box.
Attach the connecting VIB (vector interface bus) cable. The keved end
of the cable attaches to the vector module.
Press the lever down to close the connector.

Replace the plastic door and shut the cabinet door.

Turn the lower key switch to Halt and the upper key switch to Enable.
10

Check the self-test display for the new vector processor, indicated by a

V on the TYP hne.

11. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both hnes STF and ETF, it

passed self-test.

NOTE: Installation of an FV64A vector processor requires that the
attached KA64A module (T2015) be at a minimum revision of K In
addition, the ROMs on any additional KA64A modules must be at a
minimum reuvision of V2.0 (ROM 0 and ROM 1.

FV64A Vector Processc

4-27

4.13 Vector Processor Registers
The FV64A internal processor registers are listed in
Table 4-9.
See Chapter 3 for the complete ‘ist of IPR
registers. The console program allows you to access the
vector registers. Software accesses the vector registers with
MTPR/MFPR and MTVP/MFVP instructions.

Table 4-9:

FV64A Internal Processor Registers

Mnemonic Address

Type

Class

Vectwor Interface Error Statue

VINTSR

IPR123

Vector Processor Status

VPSR

IPR144

R'W

Vector Anthmetic Exception

VAER

IPR145

Vector Memorv Activity Check

VMAC

[PR146

Vector Translation Buffer Invalhdate All

VTBIA

IPR147

Vector Indirect Register Addrese

VIADR

IPR157

R'W

Vector Indirect Data Low

VIDLO

IPR158

R'W

Vector Indirect Data High

VIDHI

IPR159

R'W

Key tw Types
R-Read
W-Wnte

R'W-Read wnte
Key to Clagses.

1-lmplemented by the KA64A CPU module.
2~Implemented by the FV64A vector raodule.

4-28

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The IPRs listed in Table 4-9 are explicitly accessible to software only by
the Move To Processor Register (MTPR) and Move From Processor Register
(MFPR) instructions, which require kernel mode privileges. (The vector
indirect registers are also accessed with MTPR and MFPR instructions.
These registers are described in the System Technical User’s Guide.)
From the console, EXAMINE/l and DEPOSIT/I commands read and write
the IPRs. EXAMINE/M and DEPOSIT/M commands provide access to
the vector indirect registers above hex address 400. EXAMINENE and
DEPOSIT/VE provide access to the vector data registers.
Other instructions, the Move To/From Vector Processor (MTVP'MFVP)
instructions, are used by software to access the Vector Length, Vector

Count, and Vector Mask control registers From the console, these registers
are specified as VLR, VCR. and VMR after DEPOSIT and EXAMINE
commands, with no qualifiers

For more information on accessing the vector module registers, see the VAX
6000 Serws Vector Processor Owner's Manual

FV64A Vector Processor

4-29

OOGCOCOOGONGONOOO
X X XY XXX XOOOOCO
XX XXX

i0:9.9.6:9.0.60.9.0.6.9.00.0.0.08.6008000808080909086880044
0.90,89.9.0.9.¢.80.0.606.3600:0¢06309¢90008.84909084¢8¢
PRS00 0000 080¢ 666608888808400309.6968464¢4

19:0.6.0.0.9.9.0.0.0.0.3.0.9.0.:90.00.0000060800¢946899¢¢4$1
}18.9.:0.9.6.9.0.08.6¢0.00.00.9.00:.00080808004¢8¢00¢4
1$:9.0.9.9.8.0.0.0:0.0.8 ¢.9.¢:9.9.0.00060.9490¢0009¢

b00.0.0.0.8.0000000.84.0.0.0.60084810.600044
0.0.0.8.4.0.0800000869¢888400848004
1.0.0.¢.8.0.0.0.0.0.0.¢90.¢0.00000600044!
p.0.9.0.0.9.0.68¢900 8869900005084

K OOOOOCOOOCDOOUK
}9.0:0.6.0:9.0.0.6.0.08:4.9.00:89094

i0:8.4.0.6.0.0.0:0.60.000.¢6¢¢¢
b$.90.8.9.0.0.0.0.0.0:009
¢ ¢4
i0:.6:0.0.0.¢.6.9.¢.6.¢.9:4.94
)19:9.4.9.6.6.0.0.4,9.0.¢
KRIDNODEAX

b$:9:0.0.¢:¢.0.09
HEKARKA
19,8464

XHXK
X

XAXXX
XXX XXX

,9.9.4.6.0.¢.¢.¢9
$9.0.0.8.9.9 080481

$0.0.6.6.4.9.0.8.899.94
).0.6.0.0.0.6,4.9.0.¢068061
XXX
XA KA AKX
PO.9.9.9.¢4.00.90808¢89004¢

p0.0.6.009.0.06688066008
06!
b0.0.0.0.0.4.00.0.0,¢:00960.966606¢4
XX KXOCOOO0OCOX
AKX XX XK
P0.00.0.060¢.40.000480008808$44
J6.0.0.09.0.608¢40689008¢56805040¢1
b0 0808000600000 006$809060660.060.4¢4
P0.0.0.¢10.0.0.00.0.0.¢.600.608¢8060608.68
8¢9
10.6.0.0.0:6.¢80.6.0.9.8660000¢060008062860400
}0.0.¢:0.0.6009.6.089808008890000990960000044
0.8.0.0.9.0.60.90.0.8660.0.0.00.0.09¢9.0.0680900.¢$900061
HED O D600 000006906008 048800006000004040
}9.0.0.8:0.6.0.0.00.0.0.6.00.0.00
0008 0.99968000400880900004

b0 0000000600000
0008.6.9 85450608 866000604806604
}8:8.0:0.6.0.¢.8.0.0.60.9000¢.9.090.$4:9.6.$¢9.69080606050688080904
PO 4008 00080860080000000.08800990808080600460060500
[9.0.0.0.6.8.0.0.0.00.0.0.0400.00.06.0:000.098:68:08.600006¢890496909804

Chapter 5

MS62A Memory
This chapter discusses maintenance of MS62A memory modules. Sections
include:

MS62A Descniption

MS62A Configuration Rules

MS62A Speafications

MS62A Functional Description

Interleaving

Console Commands for Interleaving

Memory Self-Test

Memory Self-Test Errc:s

MS62A Memory Tests—RBD 3

Memory Tests (RBD 3) Examples

MS62A Control and Status Registers

MS62A Memory Installation

MS62A Memary

5-1

5.1 MS62A Description
The MS62A is a metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS), dynamic
random access memory (DRAM), which provides 32 Mbytes
of data storage. The memory module is designed for use with
the VAX 6000—400 system through the primary interconnect
known as the XMI.

MS62A Module (Side 1)
DYNAMIC

CMOS

RAM DRIVERS \

GREEN

POWER

LED

'
-

COLD START

PROM

CORNER

GATE ARRAY

Figure 5-1:

|
|

—

ZIF

> CONNECTOR

#-:

YELLOW

SELF-TEST

LED

_
-

DRAMS

5-2

RAM

DRIVERS

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

DRAMS

SEGMENTS

msb-0055-85

The 32-Mbyte memory module has the following features:

The memory module contains MOS dynamic RAM (DRAM) arrays; a
CMOS gate array that contains error correction code (ECC) logic and
control logic; and an XMI interface known as the XMI Corner.

Storage arrays are multiple banks of 72 DRAMs with four banks.
ECC logic detects single-bit and double-bit errors and corrects single-bit
errors on 64-bit quadwords.

Memory self-test checks all RAMs, the data path, and control logic on
power-up.

Quadwords,

octawords.

and hexword: are read

quadwords and octawords are written to memory.

from memory;

Memory is configured by the console program for 1-, 2-, 4-, 8-way or no
interleaving.

MS62A Memory

5-3

5.2 MS62A Configuration Rules
Table 5-1 chows how the XMI card cage should be
configured. Memory modules are placed in adjoining XMI
slots beginning at slot A.

Table 5-1:
XMI
Slot Number

Memory Configurations for the XMl Backplane
Contents

First memorv module

Second memory module

Third memory module

Fourth memory module

€

Fifth memory module!

Sixth memory module?

Seventh memory module

Eighth memory module

}{ a processor module 15 1n this slot. install the fifth memory module 1n slot B
2]f a processor module 18 1n thie slot. install the sixth memory module 1n slot C.

NOTE: Do NOT install memory modules in XMI backplane slots 1 or E.

Standard configurations include 1, 2, 4, or 8 memory modules. Systems
will run with 3, 5, cr 7 memory modules, however, svstem performance may
decrease with an odd number of memory modules. Increasing from 1 to 2
or from 2 to 4 memory modules increases performance, but increasing from
4 to 5 memory modules may decrease performance.

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

5.3 MS62A Specifications
Table 5-2 gives the MS62A specifications.

Table 5-2:

MS62A Specifications

Parameter

Description

Module Number:

T2014-B

Dimensions:

233 cm (9.2") H and 28.0 em (11.0) D

Addresses:

2-Mbyvte boundanes

Starting Address

0 to 510 Mbytes

Ending Address

32 to 512 Mbvtes

Technology:
DRAMS

1 Mbit dynarmic RAMs

GCate Arravs

CMOS gate array

Interleave:
Error Correction Code:

1-, 2-, 4-, B-way or none

Detects single- and double-bit errors and corrects singlebit errors

Temperature:
Storage Range
Operating Range

-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 151°F)
5°C to 50°C (41°F to 122°F)

Relative Humidity:
Storage and Operating

10% o 95% noncondensing

Altitude:
Storage

Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft,

Operating

Up to 2.4 kam (8000 ft)

Current:

7.5A active, 2. 8A etandby, max. at +5VBB

Power:

37.5W active, 14 5W standby, max. at +5VBB

Refresh Request Frequency:

0.8 usec

Refresh Cycle Duration:

6 cvcles

MSE2A Memory

5-5

5.4 MS62A Functional Description
The MS62A consists of an XMI Corner, a memory gate array,
address and control drivers, DRAM arrays, and a cold start
PROM.

Simplitied Block Diagram

({

\/V

Figure 5-2:

XMI BUS
Data Aoaresses and XMI Clocks
XMI CORNER

Node 1D

XCI BUS

cOLD
START
PROM

PROM ADDR and CTRL Lines

MEMORY
GATE

64 Data Bits and

ADDR and

ARRAY

SIDE 01

CTR. unes

ADDRESS
AND
CONTROL
DRIVERS

8 PRCM Data Bns

ey L L

BANK 00

ADDF ana}

ol
BANK 10
SIDE 02

CTR. Lines

DRAM

ARRAY

BANK 01 R
SIDE 01

DRAM

ARRAY

BANK 11
SIDE 02

msb-0056-89

5-6

VAX 6000-40C Options and Maintenance

The XMI Corner is located on the MS62A and contains interface logic.
The memory gaie array transfers data between the XMI Corner and the
DRAMs. The gate array also controls address multiplexing, command
decoding, arbitration, and CSR logic functions.

Address and control logic modifies address bits received from the XMI
Corner. These modified address bits are used to control the selection of
the DRAMs during reading and writing.
Memory is arranged in four banks of DRAMs Each bank contains 72
DRAM:s for a total of 288 DRAMs on each memory module.

MS62A Memory

5-7

5.5 MS62A Interleaving
Interleaving optimizes memory access time and increases
the effective memory transfer rate by operating memory
modules in parallel.

Table 5-3:

Interleaving
Interleave Address Bits!

Interleave

Array

1-Way

2-Way

4-Way

8-Way

<7>

<6>

<5>
.

'Bite <7>, <6>. and <5> 1n the Starting and Ending Address Register (SEADR: define which array 1s interleaved
Bits <29:8> and <4:0> are not used in interleavl_DSA

5-8

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

The MS62A memory supports 1-, 2-, 4-, 8-way or no interleaving. Up to

eight memory modules can be interleaved. Interleaving is done on hexword

boundaries. Interleaving addresses are set in the Starting and Ending
Address Register by the console program.
NOTE: Memory modules that fail self-test due to multiple bit errors are not
included in the interleave set.
Unless the system requires a specific. dedicated memory use, you should
run the default interleave rather than setting interleaving manually. In
default, the console program chooses a configuration for the system.

MS62A Memory

5-9

5.6 Interleaving Examples
Memory can be set up for 3 modes of interleaving.
2-Way Interleaving

Figure 5-3:

ARRAY

ADDRESS

XXXXX

OO0

2% -

XXX

&4 - 0

net

29~

4 -0
XXX

msb-0057-85

Figure 5-4:

4-Way Interieaving

ARRAY

ADDRESS

2%
765
XXX
60

&4 - 0
XXXXX

29- 7
XOOKX

65
0 1

4 -0
XXX

ADDRESS
29 - 7 65
OOOKX 11

4 -0
000X

ARRA

ARRAY

ne2

n+3

ADDRESS
29 - T €5 4 - 0
XOOXX* 0 XRXXX

msp-0058-89

5-10

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Figure 5-5:

8-Way Interleaving

ARRAY

ARRAY
net

ADDRESS

-0

ARRAY
ne
2

ADDRESS
29--8765
&4
-0
XXX 0 v 0
00(XX

ARRAY
Ned

ADDRESS
29 --8765
4 -0
XXX 1 0 €
XXX

ARRAY
neb

29 -8
XXXXK

765

ADDRESS
-0
4

XKXXX

ARRAY
ne?7

ADDRESS
29 -8
X0

76
1 1

5
1

4
-0
XXX

msp-0059-89

MS62A Memory

S$-11

5.7 Cconsole Commands for Interleaving
The SET MEMORY and SHOW MEMORY commands are
useful for setting the interleave to a memory configuration
This is not usually
other than the default interleave.
use will warrant
customer
occasional
but
advisable,
the interleave.
of
overriding the original console setting

Example 5-1:

SET MEMORY and INITIALIZE Commands

>>> SET MEMORY /INTERLEAVE: DEF&ULTO
»>> SHOW MEMORYe
U

{INTERLEAVE

€

NODE ¢
Iwv

i28M

DEFAULT

>»> SET MEMORY
>>»>

|, INTEPLERVE (748, 9+Aie

INITIALIZE

[Se.f-test

display praints)

>>> EHOW MEM:.PYQ
F

o
.

.
SINTEFLEAVE

(T+8,

>»> INITIALIZE Ae
749

Mem:ry

512

canhnct

&
.

9+A)

initialized

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

NCDE ¢
IV

128Mb

The callouts i1n Example 5-1 are explained below.
Shows the SET MEMORY command that configures interleaving with
the console program. This command invokes the default interleaving
configuration. If you set a memory configuration and want to revert to
the default, use this command.
In this example, the system has four 32-Mbyte memory modules. This
command creates a 4-way interleave of the 32-Mbyte modules. Memory
modules are located at XMI nodes 7, 8, 9, and A.

The SHOW MEMORY command displays the node number (node #),
interleave (ILV), and total usable memory (xxMb) lines from the selftest results.

Shows the SET MEMORY command that creates a 2-way interleave
as requested by the user. In this example the user exphcitly specified
how to interleave the memory modules Each interleaving set must
contain the node number of the memory module. If there is more than
one memory module in a set. they are joined by a + sign Each set of
interleaved memory modules must be separated by a comma.

0 The SHOW MEMORY command displavs the memory hnes from the
self-test pnintout for the configuration set in ©.
6 Memory nodes cannot be initialized. Attempting to do so causes an
error message to be returned.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 5 of the VAX 6000400 Ou'ner's Manual for detailed
information on the SET MEMORY and SHOW MEMORY commands.
The SET MEMORY command does not change memory interleaving: it
just modifies the memory configuration in the EEPROM. The memory
configuration specified by the SET MEMORY command takes place when
the svstem 1s reset.

MS62A Memory

5-13

5.8 Memory Self-Test
The MS62A performs an initialization and self-test sequence
on power-up or when the sequence is requested by a
console command. During MS62A self-test the array chip is
initialized, all memory locations are tested, and the control
and status registers are initialized.

Example 5-2:
$1234°€789

MS62A Memory Module Results in Self-Test

C1l2345€789

0123456789

012345¢€7¢

[

[}

[

ROMC

5-14

V1. 00

ROM.I

El1

&AL

VI
. 0C

EEPROM

NODE

STF

BPD

ETF

BED

+
+

1.00/1.00

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

TYP

+
+

XBI

YXBI

ILv

i128M

5G012345€7

The callouts in Example 5~2 are explained below.
@ The TYP Line shows that memory modules are installed in XMI slots 7
through A as indicated by the M 1n this row.

@ The STF line shows if memory modules pass self-test, as indicated by
the + in this row. If a module fails self-test, a — is indicated, but the
console still tests all pages within the module. The failing module is
included 1n the configuration, and the pages that fail self-test are not
1.sed by the system.

The LILV line indicates that two memory array modules are 2-way
interleaved and the other two modules are interleaved by themselves.
That 15, memory modules in slots 7 and 8 are 2-way interleaved into
one interleave set (indicated by all modules beginning with the letter
A) Since the memory module 1n slot A did not pass self-test, it is
interleaved by 1tself (it begins with the letter C). The memory module
in slot 9 1s 1nterleaved by itself (it begins with the letter B), since it is
left alone and cannot be interleaved wath Al, A2, or the failing module.

Q®

This VAX 6000400 system contains a total usable memory of 128
Mbytes (four 32-Mbyte memory modules).

If a hard error is detected on a memory node by self-test, that memory
module will be used. but it will be interleaved by itself. The page containing
the quadword with the hard error will not be used by the operating system.
The bit corresponding to that page in the memory bitmap will be clear.
If all MS62A nodes pass self-test, the CPU/memory interaction diagnostic is
performed on each MS62A by every CPU. The diagnostic executes a simple
read wnte test to a small portion of memory. Since there are no errors from
the self-test, the memory bitmap is set with all pages as good.

MS62A Memory

5-15

5.9 Memory Self-Test Errors
If an MS62A node fails self-test, an explicit memory test is
run on the failing module and console error messages are
displayed. The failing module is still included in the memory
configuration.

Example 5-3:

MS62A Memory Module Node Exclusion

>>>

SET MEMORY

>>>

INITIALIZE

/INTERLEAVE: (7+8,9)

{Self-test display prants)
>>>

SHOW MEMORY

/INTERLEAVE

.
(7+8,9)

6
.

NODE ¢
Iwv

96MD

If an MS62A node fails self-test. then the console executes an explicit
memory test dunng the building of the bitmap. Failing memory modules
are included in the configuration, although they are interleaved by
themselves. The only way to exclude a memory module from interleaving
is to use the SET MEMORY command without designating the node you
want to exclude Example 5-3 shows how to exclude the memory module
at node A.

During the explicit memory test. any number of the following console
messages might be displayed to aid the field service engineer in diagnosing
the problem.
7?37

Explicit
all

interleave

arrays

list

is bad.

Configuring

uninterleaved.

This means that the explicit set of memory arrays for the explicit interleave
includes no nodes that are memory arrays. All memory arrays found in the
system are unconfigured (the SET MEMORY command may have specified
nodes that were not memory modules).
?4€

Memory

interleave

set

jinconsistent:

non

...

This means that the listed nodes /n n/ do not form a valid memory interleave
set. One or more of the nodes might not be a memory array or the set
contains an invalid number of memory arrays. Each listed memory array

5-16

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

that 1s valid will be configured uninterleaved; any memory array that is
not included 1n the set will not be interleaved.
7?47

1Insufficent working memory

for

normal

operation.

This means that less than 256-Kbytes per processor of working memory
were found There may be insufficent memory for the console to function
or for the operating system to boot.
748

Unccrrectakle memory errors
must

long memory test

perfcrmed.

This means that a memory array contains an unrecoverable error.
console must perform a slow test to locate all the failing locations.
74A

Memcries

nct

interleaved due

to uncorrectable

The

errors.

This means that the listed arrays would normally have been interleaved
(by default or an explicit request). Because one or more arrays contained
unrecoverable errors, this interleave set will not be constructed.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B, Console Error Messages, and Section 6.7 in

the VAX 6000400 Ouner's Manual for more information on these errors.
When all testing 1s completed. the vellow LED (located at the center of the
module's edge farthest from the XMl backplane) lights, indicating that the

module has passed self-test. After self-test, starting and ending addresses
are set by the boot processor.

MS62A Memory

5-17

5.10 MS62A Memory Tests—RBD 3
RBD 3 of the ROM-based diagnostics sizes memory, runs
extended memory tests, and shows which test (if any) fail.

Table 5-4:

Memory Tests — RBD 3

Test

Function

T0001!

Memory Self-Test 13 pec? ¥

To0024

CSR Addressability Test

T0o0034

CSR Bit Toggling Test

T00044

Panty Error Detection Test

T00054

Error Detection and Correction Logic Test

To006!

Data Path Test

To00TM*

Quadword and Octaword Masked Wnte Logic Test

TOOORS

Interlock Lock Logic Test

T0009!

Interleaving and Addrese Boundary Test (20 sec?)

Too10!

ECC RAM March Test ‘20 mun?)

Too11!?

RAM March Test 9 min-RAM: 17 min-ROM*.

T0012'

RAM Mowving Inversions Test (2.5 hre—~RAM. 4 & hre-ROM?)

1The 'C qualifier 1f required for these tests.
2Run tumes are approximate for one 32-Mbyte module

3If self-test fails, there 18 a 60 sec umeout.
*Tests TO002 through TOOOE are run by default.

5-18

VAX 6000400 Ontions and Maintenance

Tests T0002 through T0008 are run by default. Tests T0001 and T0009
through T0012 have to be selected by the user. Tests are performed on
all MS62As unless the user chooses to test a single MS62A. Parameters
specified in the command line (refer to Table 5-5) allow one or all memory
modules to be tested. These parameters also allow RBD tests to be run from
main memory or ROM for RBD tests T0011 and T0012. The /C (confirmn
destructive memory test) switch is required with RBD tests T0001, T0009,
T0010, T0011 and T0O012. Parameters are ignored by tests T0O001 through
T0010.

Table 5-5:
Parameter'
00

RBD 3 Parameters
Function
Run teste T0011 and T0012 from maip memory (RAM ) and test all mem-

{or none!

ory modules

Run tests T0C11 and T0012 from main memory (RAM) and test mem-

ory module n only

Run tests T0O011 and T0012 from ROM and test

all memory mod-

ules

Run

tests

ule n only

TC0ll

and

T0012

from

ROM

and

test memory

meod-

}The firet character indicates if the tests are run from KAM (0. or ROM (1). The second character indicates whether o test all modules (0. or a specific module (n), where n 18 the men:-

orv moduie bacxplane slot (must be one of the following A, 9, 8,7,6,5, B, or C).

NOTE: If vou suspect that all of memory is bad, run tests T0011 ard T0012
from ROM.

The CPU’memory interaction diagnostic also runs tests that exercise
memory. See Chapter 3 for information on this CPU/memory interaction
diagnostic. See Chapter 2 for more information on running the RBDs.

MS62A Memory

5-19

5.11 Memory Tests (RBD 3) Examples
RBD memory tests are run with a number of user-selectable
switches as chown in Example 5-4 through Example 5-6.
Refer to Section 2.3 for more details on how to run RBDs.

RBD 3—All Modules with Halt on Error

Example 5-4:
>»>> T/R

Command to enter RBD moritor program

RBD3>

RBD monitor prompt,

where 3

decimal

node number

that

currently

Runs the default MS62R RBD
test;

test

resultzs

conscle terminal,

1.00

. XMA_RBL
TCCC3

TCCOZ
P
‘
;0000000C

TOOD4

3
COOOOCCC

TOOCS

receiving your

RBD3> ST3/TR/HE

any hard srrer

TOOCT

TOO06

8082

COO0OODC

00OCOOCC

is the hexa-

the processor
input

written to the
tests will halt

found

(/HE)

TOCOS

©OO0OD000 COCOO000

00000000

RBL 3>

T3/TRE

RBD 3—Contirm Switch

Te9:10/C

REC 3>

Example 5~5:

Runs the MS62A RBD tests

TC{T9

and T001C

-t

switch

1.0

. XMA_RBL
TOCZ9

;

18 needed.

memcry test

switck

Theees

a.e

sc the

confarm
Confirm destructive

(/C)

1s required

on tests 10001 and TO0QS through

TOCLC

8082

, 00000000

CO2000QQ0

000GO0ODO

COOOCOOC

00000000 COOQ000C

RBL 3>

5-20

only.

dessruct.ve tests,

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

00000000

T0012.

Example 5-6:
RBD3>

ST3/TR/T=11:12/C

Runs

TOCll

the memory module

destructive memory test

1.00

; XMA_RBD
.

RBD 3—Parameter
MSE62A

RBD

tests

and TO012

from RAM on the
in

slot

Confirm

switch

(/C)

required on these tests.

TOCl2

TOCll

[RBL

status messages are printed every two minutes;

use the

/DS qualifier

in the command string to

inbibit

.]
these massages

;

;00000000
RBL3I>

QUIT

706

RHalt

instruction

041F0604

ISF

201405B4

>>>

b
!

executed

Exit

00000000

00000000 00000000

from RBD monitor program

kernel

mode.

Console

prompt

200601D8

PSL =
=

8082

00000000 00000000 0000000C

returna

MS62A Memory

5-21

5.12 MS62A Control and Status Registers
The memory contains 24 control and status registers (CSRs)
to control the memory and log errors. All CSRs are 32
bits long and respond only to longword read and write
transactions. Only full writes are performed to the CSRs. If
a parity error occurs during a write operation, the operation
is aborted and the contents of the CSRs are unchanged.

The CSRs start at an address dependent upon the node ID. All CSR
addresses are designated as BB + n, where n is the relative offset of the
register.

Table 5-6:

MS62A Memory Control and Status Registers

CSR Name

Mnemonic

Address

Dewice Register

XDEV

BB+ 00

Bus Error Register

XBER

BE + 04

Starung and Ending Address Regster

SEADR

BB+ 10

Memory Control Register 1

MCTL1

BB + 14

Memory ECC Error Regster

MECER

BB + 18

Memorv ECC Error Address Register

MECEA

BB+ 1C

Memory Control Regaster 2

MCTL2

BB + 30

TCY Regster

TCY

BB + 34

Interlock Flag Status Registers?

IFLGn

BB+ n

1"BB refers to the base address of an XM node (2180 0000 + inode ID x 80001,
ZRefer

Table

5-7

for the relative

address of the

tere.

5-22

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Interlock

Flag Status

Regis-

Table 5-7:

Interlock Flag Registers

Interlock Flag Register

Mnemonic

Address

Interlock Flag

0 Status Regster

IFLG 0

BB + 20

Interlock Flag

1 Status Register

IFLG 1

BB + 24

Interlock Flag

2 Status Register

IFLG 2

BB + 28

Interlock Fiag

3 Status Register

IFLG 3

BB + 2C

Interlock Flag

4 Status Regpster

IFLG 4

BB + 40

Interlock Flag

5 Status Register

IFLG 5

BB + 44

Interlock Flag

6 Status Register

IFLG 6

BB + 48

Interlock Flag

7 Status Regster

IFLG 7

BB + 4C

Interlock Flag

8 Status Register

IFLG 8

BB + 80

Interlock Flag

9 Status Register

IFLG 9

BB + 84

Interlock Flag 10 Status Register

IFLG10

EB + 88

Interlock Flag 1] Status Regpister

IFLG11

BE + 8C

Interlock Flag 12 Status Register

IFLG12

BB + 100

Interlock Flag 13 Status Register

IFLG13

BB + 104

Interlock Flag 14 Status Regster

IFLG14

BB + 108

Interlock Flag 15 Status Register

IFLG15

BB + 10C

MSE2A Memory 5-23

5.13 MS62A Memory Installation

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Pull the circuut breaker on the AC power controller to the Off position.

Open the front cabinet door.

Use the following procedure when removing or installing a
memory module.

Remove the clear plastic door in front of the XMI cage.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap uttached to the
cabinet when vou handle any modules.
Lift the lever and hold it. Remove the memory module from its slot.

Hold the lever while installing the memory module in the appropriate
slot, shown in Table 5~1. (Memory modules should be installed adjacent
to each other).
Close the lever after you have inserted a new memory module.
Feplace the clear door.
10. Take off the ground strap.
11 Turn on system power and check that all nodes pass self-test.

12. Complete the installation by running appropriate self-test diagnostics
(refer to Section 5.8, and RBDs (refer to Section 5.10).

NOTE: See the Verification chapter in the VAX 6000400 Installation
Guide for complete acceptance instructions.

5-24

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

b0.0.0.0.6.0:0.¢08.0.0.000.8.99080000¢00808068080.000000000094¢73804¢

P91910.9/¢:0.08.0.800069808666800680000086¢690808008800004
08
598090808804;
.090.09
09080 0800.80808004080
F:00°9.0:0:4.9

10:0:010.0:0.076.0.0.0:6.0.0.0.60.0.6$.0¢,00680860980:660000098084
F00.90.0.0.6:8.0.0.¢808.8.8.096068636900660068080089,0604
O 000078¢0.0.0.0.0.0090900¢6¢80048600860690208004

b9:9.0.0.9:0.90.6.00.¢.9.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0089000080006609994
},0.0:9.0.6:6.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.80.0.0.¢1.49060090809.8594
RN 20 49.4.0.0.090.00.0.0.844.809080900.048¢80¢99
O.D.0.0.08.0.0.0.8.0.5.400.9.0.9.9.009680908660604
F0:9.0.0:0.0.4.8.0.8.0,0.9.06.5.:0.0.0,0.0060.08¢¢489¢
}.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.40.0.9.90.006808¢80046800]

P U000 69000008 090808080040]

884094
PO0.6°0.00.0.00.00086400.80
HERH OO

AR KX AR KK KK KAX

691
b00.0.0.0.0.06.08680008.09
119.9.9.0.90.¢.6.4,9.000¢¢00
94

D9.9.0.8.¢0.0:0.0.0.0.9.¢44¢4
9
D.4:5.0:9.4.0.0.4:48.0.4.0.4
P8.9:6.8.0.4.4.9:4.0.4.¢4
HODOOOMXX
OOOIKK
$9.9.0.9:9
9 ¢
KHXAX

KUK

X
XXX
X

XXX

XKXXAXX

UK XXXAX

XXXXUAXAXXKX

)0.6.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.4.4.¢.4

b6008480609380

0.4:0.4.00,0.0¢5.4.6.0.00.01

P$.900.0.05060400509¢4
XX XX

XA XA XAAKXAXXX

§.9.0.0.9.0.0.6.0.0.966.06.0906.08494]
1i0.0.6.0.0.0.6.0.9.0.00.68.608068¢.60.41

pH.00.0.0.4.9.9006908860006464600

P00 8¢000000080$00.0040088008)
KA XAX
00
U XK XX XX KX
XX 00000
$.4.6.0.000.06.00.9.6.9.008000808000808009¢04
$0.9.0.0.6.6900.0.00809.08.0.090088000080008044

040
U0 II 00040000004
PO S 0.0.9.6.0.6530000.0.0.
0:0.0.6.0.0.0.0.6.5.0/0.0.0.0.0.4.0.6.9,0.0,09.¢$680006640864¢4
§0.0,0:0.:0.0.0,0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0¢.¢.690680900060008080608080,4

10,0.0.0:0.0:0.0:0:0.0.6.0.9.0.0,0.8.0.0,0.9.90.0.86.9.9.¢6$580600094

J0.9:910.0.0.60.0.0.0.8.0.0.09.¢8.09.66.9.0.0.9,0.00$000900.008.500¢64
p0.8.69 650868000000.00040000.0.86666080.06809¢060969063

}0.9.0/9.10.9.0/6,0.8.6.0.0.9.6.6.6.0.9.6.60¢.0¢.8.9:09.900080008060$0808840
)9.0:4.6:0.9.6.0.0:0.¢.8:00.00.0.000.0.000.48.0.0.00900608540088484
68803

Chapter 6

DWMBA XMi-to-VAXBI Adapter
This chapter discusses the DWMBA modules. Sections include:
o

DWMBA Physical Description
Physical Layout
DWMBA Specifications

DWMBA Functional Description

DWMBA Configuration Rules

DWMBA Tests—RBD 2

DWMBA Registers

DWMBA XMI-to-VAXBI Adaptar

6~1

6.1 DWMBA Physical Description
6.1.1 Physical Layout
The DWMBA/A is an XMI module with the standard
XMI Cornmer, an XMl gelf-test OK LED indicator, IBUS
drivera/receivers and transceivers, timeout logic, and a gate
array that controls the DWMBA/A. Most of the components
on the DWMBA/A are surface-mounted.

DWMBA/A XMI Moduie
XM}

CORNER

GATE ARRAY|

|
il
\

YELLOW —1T «&
SELF-TEST

6-2

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

1 |

| 2r

LED

11U

Figure 6-1:

°°"“‘E,}°“
| SEGMENTS

‘

The DWMBA/B is a standard VAXBI module with a VAXBI

Corner, including a BIIC interface chip, the primary
interface between the VAXBI bus and the DWMBA/B node
logic, a clock driver, and a clock receiver. The DWMBA/B
gate array is used mostly for data path logic. The VAXBI selftest OK LED is on the VAXBI Corner, and the module selftest OK LED is at the module edge opposite the connector
edge.

Figure 6-2:

DWMBA/B VAXBI Module
MASTER

SEQUENCER —

YELLOW

VAXBI

SELF-TEST

CORNER ~\

LED
L.

.A""’y,
—

SLAVE

SEQUENCER —§
-

VELLOW
SELF-TEST —{

LED

—

|
T
V

- .

aate

ARRAY

BIC

B B

.
| »

\|
'

CLOCK

RECEIVER
Z2F
connector
SEGMENTS

]

‘

CLOCK

—DRER

mgb-006 -89

DWMBA XMI-to-VAXBI Adapter

6-3

6.1.2 DWMBA Specifications
The following specifications apply to the DWMBA modules.

Table 6-1:

DWMBA/A XMI Module Specifications

Parameter

Description

Module Number:

T2012

Dimonsions:

233 cm (9.2 H 2 28,0 em (11.0", D 2 0.23 am (0.093")
thick

Temperature:

Sto-age Range

-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 151°F)

Operating Range

5°C to 50°C (41°F to 122°F)

Relative Homidity:

Storage and operating

10% to 95% noncondensing

Altitude:

Storage

Up to ¢.8 km (16,000 ft)

Operating

to 2.4 kom (8000 ft,
Up

Current:

3A at +5V
200mA at +5VBB

Power:

6-4

16W

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 6-2:

DWMBA/B VAXBI Module Specifications

Parameter

Description

Module Number:

T1043

Dimensions:

203 cm (8" H £ 23.3 en (9.2"YD x 0.23 em (0.093") thick

Temperature:

Storage Range

40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 151°F)

Operuting Range

6°C to 50°C (41°F to 122°F)

Relative Bumidity:
Storage and operating

10% to 95% noncondensing

Altitude:
Storage

Up to0 4.8 km (16,000 ft)

Operating

Up t0 2.4 km (8000 f)
6A at +5V

Current:

10mA at -12V

Power:

30w

Table 6-3:

DWMBA Cables

Part Number

Description

17-00849-08

18" DWMBA/B to DWMEBA/B AC/DC OK cable, from VAXBI cage 2 slot 1
{segment C2) to VAXBI cage 1 slot 1 (segment C1).

17-01897-01

2
15 DWMBA cables for expander cabinet, from XMl slots C, B, 1, and
as needed (segments D and E) to VAXBI cages 3, 4, 5, and € alot 1 (segments D and Ei. Two per DWMBA.

17-01897.02

7° DWMBA cables, from XM] elot E (segments D and E+ to VAXBI cage 2

17 01897-03

25" DWMBA cables, from XMI alot D (segmente D and E) to VAXBI cage

slot 1 (segments D and E). Two per DWMBA.

1 alot 1 (segments D and E). Two per DWMBA

DWMBA XMti-to-VAXBi Adapter

6-5

6.2 DWMBA Functional Description
The DWMBA adapter provides an information path between
the XMI bus and IO devices on the VAXBI bus. The DWMBA
consists of two modules: the DWMBA/A and the DWMBA/B.
The DWMBA/A resides on the XMI bus, and the DWMBA/B
resides on the VAXBY bus. Four 80-pin cables, which mzke
up the IBUS, connect the two modules.

Figure 6-3:

DWMBA XMi-to-VAXBI Adapter Block Diagram

A
VAXB!

1BUS
DWMBA/A
MODULE fgcmcmnie]

% W

LOGIC

w—

DWMBA®B

XMI

CORNER

12012 MODULE

CORNER
®nc)

MODULE

LOGIC

T1043 MODULE

XMl

' V

VAXBI
mab-0052-89

&6 VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

‘

The DWMBA/A contains the XMI Corner, the register files, XMI required
registers, DWMBA-specific registers, and the control sequencers for the

XMI interface.

The DWMBA/B contains the = lIC interface chip, interconnect drivers,
control sequencers to handle the control of the data transfer, status bits
to/from the DWMBA/A's register files and the BIIC, DWMBA/B speafic
registers, decode logic for direct memory access (DMA) operation, and
VAXBI clock-generation aircwtry.

The DWMBA/A and DWMBA/B are connected by four cables of 30 wires
each. These 120 wires make up the IBUS, which transfers data and control
information between the two modules.

The DWMBA uses CPU and DMA transactions to exchange information.

CPU transactions anginate from the KA64A(s) and are presented to the
DWMBA from the XMI bus with the processor as the XMI commander and
the DWMBA as the XMI responder.

DMA transactions originate from VAXBI nodes that select the DWMBA as
the VAXBI slave. These are read or write transactions targeted to XMI
memory space or are VAXBI-generated interrupt transactions that target a
KA64A. For DMA transactions, the DWMBA is the XMI commander, and
the MS62A is the XMI responder.

The VAX 6000400 system u=es a 30-bit physical address. The DWMBA
can be both a master and a slave on the VAXBI. As a master, it carmes
out transactions requested by its XMI devices. As a slave, it responds to
VAXBI transactions that select its node.

DWMBA XMi-to-VAXBI Adapter

6-7

6.3 DWMBA Configuration Rules
This section describes the configuration rules for the
DWMBA/A modules in the XMI card cage and for the
DWMBA/B modules in the system’s two 6-slot VAXBI card
cages.

Figure 6-4:

VAX 6000400 Slot Numbers

VAXB!

VAXB

CAGE Y

CAGE2

XM! CARD CAGE

)

|>~'"£’»z‘f;'
6

321

6-8

EDCBASG
B 765413 21

a—

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

b-00-88

DWMBA/As are placed in the order shown in the table below:
Table 6~4:

DWMBA Contiguration

XMI Node No.

VAXBI Cage No.

Locaticn

System cabinet

Svstem cabinet

Expander cabinet

Exzpander cabinet

Configuration rules are as follows:

The DWMBA/B which corresponds to the DWMBA/A in XMI slot D is
placed in VAXBI cage 1. slot 1. The DWMBA/B which corresponds to
the DWMBA/A in XMI slot E is placed in VAXBI cage 2, ilot 1.

All additional DWMBA/Bs are placed in slot 1 (rightmost slot) of each
card cage in the VAXBI expander cabinet, as shown in Table 6-4.

DWMBA XMI-to-VAXB! Adapter

6-8

6.4 DWMBA Tests—RBD 2
The DWMBA ROM-based diagnostic, RBD 2, checks
functions of both DWMBA modules. RBD 2 tests the DWMBA
modules and can trace the subtests, pinpointing errors.

The DWMBA has no on-board self-test. The boot processor ROM code
tests DWMBAs during additional power-up tests. At power-up, the boot
processor first sizes all DWMBAs and then serially tests each one.
When invoking RBD 2 from the monitor, the START command requires a
parameter. This parameter is the XMI node number (hexadecimal) of the
DWMBA/A module of the DWMBA to be tested.
Example 6~1:
>>>

DWMBA Tests—RBD 2

T/R

!
1

RBDl> STZ/TR D

; TO001

TO00S5

‘

; TOC16

hexadecimal node number

processcr

your

Runs the DWMBA RBD,

{

the

results

terminal:

that

of the

currently receiving

input.

DWMBA at

XMI

testing

rode

written to

number

the

Test

console

1.00

;XBI_TEST

TO017

;000000000

TOOUE

TOC18
1

0000000CG

TOOO7

TOO19
8G82

00000000

TOOO8

TO020

TO0OS

TOC21
1

00000000

TOO12

TO022
00000000

QUIT

>>>

6-10

wheie 1 is the

' RBD monitor prompt,

RBD1>

Command to enter RBD monitoer program

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

TOO013

TOC23

TOO014

TO024

00000000

TOO1S

TO025

00000000

Table 6-5: DWMBA XMi-to-VAXBI Adapter RBD Tests
Test

Function

Default

T0001

DWMBA/A XM] Module CSR test

Yes

T0002

XMI Low Longword Parity Error test

T0003

XMI High Longword Parity Error test

T0004

XMI Function and D Parity Error test

T0005

DWMBA/B CSR test

Yes

T0006

BIIC VAXBI Loopback Transacton test

Yes

TOQ07

BIIC VAXBI Transaction test

Yes

T0008

DMA test

Yes

T0009

DMA Buffer test

Yes

T0010

XM] Panty Error Interrupt test

T0011

Write Sequence Error Interrupt test

To012

CPU Buffer C/A Fetch Panty Error (Interrupt) test

(es

T0013

CPU Buffer Data Fetch Parity Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0014

DMA Buffer Data Fetch Panty Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0015

VAXBI! Interlock Read Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0016

DMA.-A Buffer C/A Load Panty Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0017

DMA-A Buffer Data Load Panty Error (IVINTR) test

Yes

T0018

DMA.B Buffer C'A Load Parity Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0019

DMA-B Buffer Data Load Panty Error (IVINTR) test

Yes

T0020

CPU Buffer Data Load Panty Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0021

BCI Panty Error test

Yes

70022

Noneustent Memory (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0023

CRD Error (Interrupt) test

Yes

T0024

VAXBI Interrupt test

Yes

T06025

VAXBI IP Interrupt test

Yes

T0026

No Stall Timeout Test

DWMBA XM!-to-VAXBI Adapter

6-11

6.5 DWMBA Registers
Two sets of registers are used by the DWMBA adapter:
VAXBI registers (residing in the BIiC) and DWMBA registers
(residing on both modules of the DWMBA). The DWMBA
registers include the XMI required registers and DWMBAspecific registers a-ldressed in DWMBA private space.

Table 6-6:

VAXBI Registers

Name

Mnemonic

Address!

Device Regster

DTYPE

bb+00

VAXBI Control and Status Register

VAXBICSR

bb+04

Bus Error Register

BER

bb+08

Et-or Interrupt Control Register

EINTRSCR

bb+0C

Interrupt Destination Regster

INTRDES

bb+10

IPINTR Mask Regiater

IPINTRMSK

bhild

Force-Bit [IPINTR'STOP Destination Register

FIPSDES

bb+18

{PINTR Source Register

IPINTRSRC.

bb+1C

Ending Address Regster

EADR

bb+24

BCI Control and Status Register

BCICSR

bb+28

Write Status Regster

WSTAT

bb+2C

Force-Bit IPINTR'STOP Command Register

FIPSCMD

bb330

User Interface Interrupt Contro] Register

UINTRCSR

bb+40

General Purpose Regiater 0

GPL.O

bb+F0

General Purpose Register 1

GPR1

bb+F4

General Purpose Reguster 2

GPR2

bb+F8

General Purpose Regster 3

GPR3

bb+FC

Slave-Only Status Register

SOSR

bb+100

Recetve Congole Data Register

RXCD

bb+200

1'The abbreviation "bb” refers to the base address of 8 VAXBI node (the address of the first location of nodegpace

6-12

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 6-6 lists the VAXBI registers. The VAXBI registers are described in
Chapter 5 of the VAXBI Options Handbook. Table 6-7 Lists the DWMBA

registers.

Table 6~7:

DWMBA XMl Registers

Name

Mpemonic!

Address*

Denice Regster

XDEV

BB+00

Bus Error Register

XBER

BB+04

Falhing Address Reg:ster

AXFADR

BB+08

Responder Error Address Regster

AREAR

BB+0C

Error Summary Register

AESR

BB+10

Interrupt Mask Register

AIMR

BB+14

Implhied Vector Destination/Dhagnostic Register

AIVINTR

BB+18

Dag 1 Regster

ADG1

BB+1C

Control’Status Register

BCSR

BB+40

Error Summary Register

BESR

BB+44

Interrupt Destination Regster

BIDR

BB+48

Vector Offeet Register

BVOR

BB+50

Vector Register

BVR

BB+54

Diagnostic Control Reguster 1

BDCR1

BB+o8

Reserved Regster

BB+5C

Timeout Address Register

BTIM

BB+4C

'If the first letter of the mnemomic '8 X~ or 'A. it indicates that the regster re-

sides on the DWMBA'A, a first letter of "B" indicates that the register remdes on the
DWMBA'B

?The abbreviation BB’ refers to the base address of an XMI node (the address of the first lo-

cation of nodespace).

DWMBA XMk-to-VAXBI Adapter

6-13

¢
PO 0005.6.9.00,00,060.00.00.¢60.80006000086680005600804808
5080809000909
$0.0.0.8.6:0.00.08.0.909.0.00.80.8900¢8000909¢03
)9.8.0°6.0.0.¢8.4:00.000.9.0:000.0.0.00.6000009.09.8660¢90088090¢4
1,0:4.9.6.0.6.0.9.0.8.0.9.0.0.00.07.0.0.0.9.0.90800¢00¢¢¢68¢804¢¢90004

L O.0.0:0.6.¢.910.9.0.0.:0.0.0.0.9.000080088060.9880863900009!
19:0.0.8.0.0.6.0.0.9.0:0.0.0.0.0,0.8.0808.088$0.$809.698¢8¢6084
[(9.9.9010:6.0.0.0,6.9.0.0.9.0.09.0.96.0.9.0.8¢9.¢.899.6.4.060¢8081
}9.0.0.9.9.6:0.0.6.6,6.0.9.0.9.8.0.0.9.9.0.8.0,6890.69.00049¢94
}19.910.0:0.6.0.0.0.9.00.8.0.9:8,0.0.0.9.0868.506688¢09004

i0.8:0.470.6.0.9.0.316.0.6.0.0.8.0.8,08¢.0.6.0¢96.$80094
0.0:90.9:8.8:0.6.4.0.6.9:80.8.680808.800064¢004
$0.00.9.¢.6.00800869.46¢8489808008099¢

)9.8:0.8.0.6.000.0850998.06080003444
10.6.9.0.0.6.0.00.040.9¢.96.084306044

110.9.0.0.0.0.6.0.¢.06.0,6908¢806091
1;0.6.0.9:0.9.8.4.0.0.0.9.0.¢.6.8,4.4.¢.94
.99.0.9/0.9,8.4.8.666.9.0.0.0.¢0¢

).0.9.0.0:0.6.8.0.6.8.0.9.¢8.6.0
}:8,819.9.¢.9.8.5.0.9.0.86.9.4
60,04
10.9:0,9.0.9.0,¢/0
b9.:9.0.9.0.9,8.9.6.0.¢

HEXXAXAXX
XAXKXXX
p.0:9.0.94

XXX
X

XXXXX

XUXAXKX

KAXAKAXKXK
XX XX XA XX XXX
XA KAXXXAKA
AKX

XHAR KA XX KAXXKKY

)0,90.9.0.68.9.09.9.2096¢4
D0.8.0.8.0.0.0.60.06¢96¢8$0¢4

F 08 0.6.0.9.6.900000 8990869

XX XK OO

XA XK AKX

},0.6.0.8.0.9.0,0.00.0,0.0909080$080¢4
908
48044
19,800,0000.9.0.¢..9.6659060

10.0:0.0.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.00¢098060¢008¢1
J000.0.00.0.0.0.6.0.9.09.0.0.00800690¢9
68894

PO 80600600099 0906006900890006¢609¢¢

P 0000.0.0.0090800060909800880080804044
b G005 8.60.09.0.0.69.08.4.90.68.¢85899608.08¢8004

)9.810.9:0.8.6:0.0.4.0:8.000.8.600.0099.000060¢000900
1:8:6°0.0/0.0.0.8.0°00:00:0.9.9.08,08.¢.90.6.6$860.99.0.0.808¢80

£0.8:0.0/6:0.6.9.6.4.0.8.60.86:00.0.50.60,0.09.0.55.080.0.06.56.80.90.9
£0.6.0.0:0.0.0.870.:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.8.00.8.0950.$¢68.889800.806.99900

16.0.6,0.0.6.¢.8:0.9.0.0.0:9.0.0.6.¢.0.0.9.0.8.0,90.900¢.669.¢88990.08009

)0.0.9.0:0:0:6.0.0:610:0.0.0.0.4.9.9.04.90.9.098.0$$0900500000000049.80¢
)0

00000000008 46.00090.00699.8.98006859.00906500.999.90

Chapter 7

XMl Card Cage
This chapter describes the XMI card cage. Removal and replacement
procedures are detailed, and configuration restrictions are listed. Sections
include:

XMI Card Cage Description
System Use
Speafications

XMI Card Cage Removal

Switching XMI Card Cages

XMI Card Cage Replacement

Instaling Modules ir the XMI Card Cage

XMI Troubleshooting

XMi Card Cage

7-1

7.1 XMl Card Cage Description
7.1.1

System Use

The XMI card cage provides the high-speed system
bus.
Figure 7-1 is a simplified block diagram showing
physical connections between the XMI card cage and other
components in the cabinet

Figure 7-1:

H7215

XMI Card Cage Connections

H7274

H7214

VAXBI

CHASSIS

med-0100-86

7-2

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The XMI card cage is a 1l4-slot cage with zero insertion force (ZIF)
connectors
The cage is 3 inches deeper than a VAXBI cage, providing
for larger XMI modules. The backplane area extends over three of the

five connector segments, which leaves two segments for /O pins. Mounted
in the center rear of the X)MI backplane is a daughter card that holds
the central arbiter chip. Four slots in the center of the cage have no /O
connectors, 8o only processor or memory modules may be placed in these
slots.
For each VAXBI bus, there must be an XMI-to-VAXBI adapter. This adapter
(DWMBA) consists of two modules: a DWMBA/A module in the XMI card
cage and a DWMBA/B module in the VAXBI card cage. (See Chapter 5.)

XMi Card Cage

7-3

7.1.2 XM! Card Cage Specifications
The XMI card cage has 14 slots and is located in the upper
part of the cabinet. The field-replaceable unit (70-2437301) does not include the power bus bar assembly, the two
side mounting plates, the daughter card, and three foam air
seals.

01—

[ =il

Figure 7-2:

FRONT

XMl Card Cage

crf

__o

XM! CARD CAGE

[(:‘r

e AN
mgb-0140-89

Table 7-1:

XMI Card Cage Assembly Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

70-24373-01, 14-alot cage with no daughter card or bus bare

Location:

Upper right front

Dimensions:

12°Hx1012 Wx12 114 L

Weight:

29 Ibs

Power:

One H7215 DC regulator and two H7214 DC regulators

Service From:

Front and rear of cabinet

7-4

VAX 6000400 Options and *Maintenance

Table 7-2:

XMI Card Cage Cables

Item

Part Number

Description

Cablea:

17-01525-01

XMI o both H7214e

17-01566-01

XM to J3 of H72156

17-01568-02

XM to J4 of XTC, 20-pin ribbon

17-01662-01

XM ground strap

17-01812-01

XMI to filter board 1n system control mssembly to power the TK umit

17-01833-01

Fail safe enable cable, XMl to H7231 battery backup unit and H405

17.01897.01

15 DWMBA cables for expander cabwet, from XMI elots C, B, 1, and
2 we needed (segments
D and E) to
VAXBI cages 3, 4. 5, and 6 slot 1 (seg-

ments D and E). Two per DWMBA
17-01897-02

T DWMBA cables. from XMI slot E (segments D and E'
to VAXBI] cege 2 slot 1
tsegments D and E). Two per DWMBA

17-01897.03

25" DWMBA cables, from XMI slot D (segments D and £/ o VAXBI cage 1 slot 1
tsegmenta D and E). Two per DWMBA

Tools Required:

VAXBI Tool Kit

A2-M1094-10

Includes.

Torque screwdniver
Large Phillipe and flat screwdnvers
Small Phillips ecrew-holding screw.
driver or one with magnetic tip
11'32" nutdnver

Subassemblies:

Daughter Card
Bus Bar Assembly

Foam Air Seals

54-18177-01

Smal] module that mounts on XM! back-

12-27€76-01

+5Vi«5VBB/Ground

74-34536-01

Three pieces of foam used for aur seals

12-27338-01
12-27939-01

74-34536-03

plane

-5.2V XM1 bus bara
-2V XMI bus bars

74-36670-02

XMI Card Cage

7-5

7.2 XMi Card Cage Removal
The XMI card cage is removed from the front of the cabinet
after you disconnect connections at the backplane.

7.2.1 Prepare for Remcval
Prepare the system for shutdown. Set up a work epace
nearby where you can store the modules and work on the
XMI card cage. Label and disconnect the gignal and power
connections.

Figure 7-3:

XMI Backplane Cables and Power Connections

--—E-w“

Eem—

—

\.\&

il 1
DR

NUL

% *\ |

| AL

;
msb-0227R-80

7-6

VAX 6000400 Opticns and Maintenance

Perform an orderly shutdown of the sysiem.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Unplug the machine.

Open the rear cabinet door.

Pull the circuit breaker on thz AC power controller to the Off position.
The AC power controller is at the bottom rear of the cabinet.

Drop the I/O bulkhead tray to expose the card cages.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.
NOTE: Figure 7-3 shows the end to disconnect for each of the following
cables.

Disconnect the cable to the XTC power sequencer (17-01568-02).
Disconnect the 8 cables (17-01897-02 and -03) between DWMBA/A
modules (1n the XMI card cage) and DWMBA/B modules (in the VAXBI
card cage).

Disconnect four wires on the bus bars that go to the TK unit (17-0181201) +5V,; +12V; and two ground connections (use 11/32 inch nutdriver).
10. Disconnect the fail

safe enable cable (17-01833-01) connection to

+5VBB.

11. Disconnect the fail

safe enable cable (17-01833-01) connection to

ground
12 Disconnect the cable to the H7215 power regulator (17-01566-01).

(Remove connector from the regulator.)

13. Disconnect the harnesses to the two H7214 power regulators. (On each

regulator, remove the four screws from the leads.)

14. Disconnect

the lines to the two H7214 regulators (17-01525-01).

(Remove connector from the regulator.)

15. Disconnect the ground strap to the chassis (17-01662-01).

Remove the
screw from the bus bar with a large Phillips screwdriver, and with your

free hand catch the nut in back of the bus bar.

XMl Card Cage

7-7

7.2.2 Removal of XMI Card Cage from Cabinet
Before removing the cage from the cabinet, remove all
modules and set them aside.

XM! Card Cage

ffln

Figure 7-4:

FRONT

7-8

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

1. Open the front cabinet door.
2.

Remove the clear plastic door in front of the XMI cage.
CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.

Lift up the levers and hold. Remove modules from the cage. Put them
in protective bags or ESD boxes and note which slots they had been in.

Remove and save the four mounting screws that fasten the XMI cage
assembly to the chassis (see Figure 7—4 for location of these screws).

Pull the cage out of the system cabinet carefully so that you do not
damage the power harnesses or bus bars. Push from the back to ease
the cage out toward the front of the cabinet.

XMi Card Cage

7-9

7.3 Switching XMI Card Cages
The entire bus bar assembly, the daughter card (static
gensitive), and the two egide mounting plates must be
removed from the XMI cage taken from the eystem and
installed on the new XMI cage. Three pieces of foam air
seal mus® Ye installed on the new cage.

Figure 7-5:

7-10

XMI Bus Bar Assembly and Daughter Card

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

7.3.1 Removal of Bus Bars and Daughter Card
Remove the bus bars and daughter card as follows:
1.

First remove the +5V/+5VBB/Ground bus bar assembly. Keep all screws

and note where they came from. See @ in Figure 7-5.

Then remove the two smaller bus bars for -5.2V and -2V. See @.
Disconnect the blue cable at the far left that goes to -12V. See ©.
CAUTION: The daughter card is static sensitive. You must wear an
antistatic wrist strap attached to the cabinet when you handle any
modules.

Unscrew the three large thumbscrews that hold the daughter card to

Pull the daughter card away from the backplane.

XMI Card Cage

7-11%

7.3.2 Moving XMl Side Mounting Plates and Installation of
Parts

Remove the two side mounting plates from the defective
cage and install on the new cage (see Figure 7-6). Install
on the new cage the bus bars and daughter card that you
removed from the old cage. Install the new foam air seals.

Figure 7-6:

XMl Cage Side Mounting Plates

msd-0104-89

7-12

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

t‘

Perforia the tasks in the following order:
1.

Remove the two side mounting plates by removing four screws. See
@
in Figure 7-6. Do not install these screws on the new cage yet.

OUn the new cage install the two smaller bus bars and then install the
+5V/+5VBB/Ground bus bar assembly.

Using the torque screwdriver

from the VAXBI tool kit, torque screws to 9 (+/-1) inch-pounds.

Instali the foam air seals in the locations shown in & in Figure 7-7.

Install the side mounting plates.
CAUTION: The daughter card is static sensitive. You must wear an
antistatic wrist strap attached to the cabinet when you handle it.

Install the daughter card.

Figure 7-7:

Installation ot Foam Alr Seals

Fab-0105A-90

XMI Card Cage

7-13

7.4 XMI Card Cage Replacement
Return the new cage to the system cabinet. Reattach all the
connections on the backplane, install the screws attaching
the cage to the chassis, and then put the modules back into
their slots (see Figure 7-8).

Figure 7-8:

7-14

XMI Card Cage

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The new XMI cage should be installed in the cabinet as follows:
1.

Slide the XMI card cage into the system cabinet taking care not to
damage the power harnesses or bus bars. Push from the front and pull
from the rear.
Install the four mounting screws that secure the XMI cage assembly to

the system cabinet. See @ 1n Figure 7-8.
Reattach the power connections.

On the H7214 regulators, torque the screws to 27 (+/-5) inch-pounds.

Make sure the two remote sense wires going to the two H7214
regulators go to the correct regulator. If they are switched, the +5V
supplies may not turn on.

Reattach all signal connections.
Put the IO bulkhead tray back into place at the rear of the cabinet.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.

Insert the modules into their correct slots.

Replace the clear door.
Turn on system power and check that all nodes pass self-test.
NOTE: See the Verification chapter in the VAX 6000-400 Installation
Guide for complete acceptance instructions.

XMi Card Cage

7-i5

7.5 installing Modules in the XMI Card Cage
The XMI card cage design and XMl architecture place some
restrictions on the use of the slots.
¢

§lot 1 or slot E must hold a module. This module must
be 8 KAG64A or 8 DWMBAL

No memory modules in elots 1 and E.

No IO modules in slots § through A.

Only XMI modules may be placed in the XMI card cage;
installing any other modules may destroy the modules.

Figure 7-8:

Numbering of XMl Slots

XKMI CARD CAGE

DCBAOY9

876543

mso-0107 80

7-18

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

An XMI node takes its node number from the slot in which it resides. This
is unlike the VAX?2! bus where the node number assignment derives from
node ID plugs inserted into the backplane for each slot.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the cabinet
when you handle any modules.

CAUTION: You must hold the XMI card cage lever while removing or
inserting a module in the XMI card cage. Failure to do so may result in
damage to the module.
Figure 7-9 shows the numbering of the slots in the XMI card cage. Slots
are numbered in hexadecimal to correspond to the self-test display. Because
the daughter card is mounted in the center of the XMI backplane, no /O
cables can be connected to slots 6 through 9. Also, no /O modules are to go
in the two adjoining slots, 5 and A. Another configuration restraint is that
either the first or last slot in the cage must house a non-memory module.
If no module is in either slot, the YTM
MI shuts down. Memory modules must
not be placed in the first and last ots.
Any problems with the XMI cage or modules are indicated in the first three
bnes of the self-test display (see Sertion 2.2 for an explanation of these
lines).

CAUTION: Never attempt to insert a VAXBI module into an XMI card
cage. The backplane technology for the XMI and VAXBI is similar but
incompatible. Inserting a VAXBI module into an XMI card cage can destroy
the module. Note that VAXBI modules are shorter than XMI modules.

XM!I Card Cage

7-17

7.6 XMl Troubleshooting
When you install modules in the XMI card cage, several items
need to be checked. Table 7-8 gives a checklist of items to
troubleshoot.

Table 7-3:

XMl Troubieshooting Checklist

Symptom

Posesible Cause

No power to cages

Clear plastic door not in place or not latched.

Intermitent module response

Poor contact st connector
Loose cabhng at the backplane

Module does not appear on

Loose cabling st the backplane

eelf-test results

System not configured correctly.

7-18

VAX 5000—400 Options and Maintenance

Before turning power back on, make sure the clear plastic doors are in place
and latched You can then push the reset switch on the H7206 PAL unit
(see Figure 9-9) to return power to the system.

The XMI bus requires a non-memory module in slots 1 or E. If both of these
slots are empty, the bus will shut down.
CAUTION: Inserting a memory module in slot 1 or E will damage the
memory module.

If you receive intermittent module response, or the module does not show
up on self-test as being present at all, make sure that the module is seated
properly, and check the backplane cabhing.
Modules may fail self-test because of poor contact at the connector. A
thorough cleaning of the gold pads on the module and of the connector
in the card cage corrects this contact failure. If the connections seem to be
faultv. clean the contact areas of the connector and module. Table 7—4 lists
wols and supphbes for connector cleaning.

Tabie 7-4:

XMl Connector Cieaning Supplies

Item

Part

Number

Function

VAXBI tool It

A2-M1094-10

Mantaining card cages

Paddle »1pe handle

47-00116-02

Holding paddle wipes

Paddle wipes

12.26321-01

Cleaning contact area

inmde ZIF connec-

tore

Gold-wipesTM

49-01603-00

Cleaning module connector contact area

Protective goggles

29-16141-10

Eye prote.bon

Nitrile gloves

29-26403-00

Hand protection

TTMGold-wipes 18 8 tredemark of TEXWIPE.

XMi Card Cage

7-19

10,0000 060000800.60.0000000000008008.9509.065860000808004
)6:0.0.0.0.60.00000080.5.0.808.0800090808:68000600600000009¢3
19:9:0.0°0.8.0.4.000.0.0.6.080.6086006080008080890062800860001
:4.0.0.6.000080.00.6:0.0000¢0060008808000080000080¢004
00:9.0:0.0.0.8.6.0.6.0.68:0.6.0.8066.80.800.60¢808660080290¢4
10.0.9.9.0.6.6.0.9.49.9.6.9.00.0.8¢.9¢060860308000808890
4

:0.4:0.6.0.6.0:0.0.60.6.0¢:099.000.0.040$8080898098009
10.0.0.6.6.0.60.00.00.0.0.00.0,0:0.9.0.00.¢5969084¢80¢001
00.09
80906006 0080.004¢4
$0:8.0.9.0.00.80.000000.9.
P 0 00.08000.00000.0.00.8.06000008¢808089
J2.00.8.0.8.00.0.0900008:0000.600000008¢01
J0,6:0.0.0.0.6.0.80¢0.0,08.00.00.06000008004

PR 00000080000 68480800000084¢
. 0.9.0.0.6:0.0.808,0¢0$8008080.9029

i#.9.0.90.0.000.99.960.000.66.08604
:0.0.0.6.0.80900.88,00066000)

D0 00 0.0.06¢0948.008¢8¢944
HHOOOKKHONEK
.0,0.9.0.0.9.6.0.8.6.0,6.494
10.9.0.0.8.0.6.86.0.6,¢4

:0.0:0.9.0.9.0.8.6.04
},0.9,0.9.8.9.0.94
:0.9.6,0.0.04
JOOOK
XXH

AXXXX
XAAAKANA

Fe.8.9.8.0.4 0.9
}0.9.0.8.0.4.9.9.0.4
}0.8.6.0.009.8 06094
}0.4,0.0.0.8.¢.6.¢.6.0869

KX XA
XHAAKKKXKAXK

6. $.6.0.0.008¢8480808004
F.8.6.0.0.6:0.0.8.09.4.6,0.8.0.8.0.644¢4

F0.9.0.00.0.600.000.090809900¢9

P0.6.0.00.06.9.9000480.94.8.089604]

00.0.0.0.¢.9:6.¢.0.0.0.89.60.00.609065400
§08.0.0:0.0:¢.9:0.0.0.9.00.0806000906.0¢0¢4

J0.0.0.0.6.9.0.0.0.00000089800 0600009841

808
0854946/
)0.016:90.0.004.00.00.089¢0.¢8900
0
¢808050.004084¢
000860
000800008
§000060
Je 006000808 0600000008 084650090808¢400/

04
10.070.0.00.0.0.0.00.0:0.9.0.6.0:4.6.0.9.80$0800080500080
} 09 0.09.0.0.0.09.0600 00098000048 805.6888 69890000
)9.00.0.0.0.60.0.0.0.000¢.80.9085.$09.0089.8000008¢46004]
10.070.0.¢:4.0.8.60.0.$.00.08990.:69.8.6588 600583058000 0.880.9 0

$6519.9:0.0.0.0.0.0.69:9.6.8.0606.0080.40.0.0¢003800006498¢909.899.0¢
) 09009900¢.0:0'0.0.0.8¢0.8.06.08¢00.0.0.6.8.08.68850036.640808004

J 0000 00 00 LN LGP LSNPSV

9
0909006 860.0000¢9060.88988%

Chapter 8

VAXBI Card Cage
This chapter describes the VAXBI card cage and its use in the VAX
6000—400 syst-m. Removal and replacement procedures are detailed, and
configuration restrictions are histed. Sections include:
e

VAXBI Card Cage Description
System Use
Specifications

Subassemblies

VAXBI Card Cage Removal

°»

Switching VAXBI Cages

VAXBI Card Cage Replacement

VAXBI Expansion and Configuration Rules

VAXBI Troubleshooting

VAXBI Card Cage

8-1

8.1 VAXBI Card Cage Description
8.1.1 System Use
The VAXBI card cage serves as the I/O subsystem of the VAX
6000-400 system. Each processor cabinet has two VAXBI
card cages, each providing a separate VAXBI channel. The
interface between the VAXBI bus and the XMI bus is the
DWMBA option. The DWMBA/B module requires one slot
in the VAXBI card cage.

Figure 8—1:

VAXBI Card Cage Connections

H7215

H7214

VAXBI

CHASSIS

YO DEVICES |——

. VO DEVICES
meb-C 0B-88

8-2

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The VAX 6000400 system uses the VAXBI bus for input/output. Each
system has two VAXBI card cages, which provide two VAXBI channels of
six slots each. A VAXBI expander cabinet can also be added, which can
hold up to four VAXBI cages.

The VAXBI card cage has zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors. The
backplane area extends over two of the five connector segments; the
remaining three segments are used for O connections. Installed on the
cage are /O transition headers.

Each VAXBI bus has its own XMI-to-VAXBI adapter (DWMBA). The
DWMBA/B module of this adapter resides in the VAXBI card cage.

VAXBI Card Cage

8-3

8.1.2 VAXBI Card Cage Specifications
The VAXBI card cage (see Figure 8-2) is a 6-slot cage.
The VAXBI card cages are located i, the upper part of
the cabinet, on the left as you view the system from
the front. The field-replaceable unit (H9400-AA) does not
include the power bus bar aseembly, the node ID plugs,
and the terminators. Two cages configured as two separate
VAXBI channels are in each system cabinet.

Figure 8-2:

VAXBI Card Cages

—|—

FRONT

—

TITUL L

'—T CARD cAGES

meb-0141-89

8-4

VAX 6000~400 Options and Maintenance

Table 8-1:
Parameter

VAXBI Card Cage Assembly Speclfications
Description

VAXBI Card Cage H9400-AA, one 6-slot cage with no terminators or bus bars; meludes trangtor headers

Location:

Upper left front

[Dimensions:

125"Wx 85" Dx10° L

Weight:

26 lbs (2-cage assembly)

Power:

One

Bervice From:

Front and rear

Table 8~2:
Part Number
17-00849-08

H72i5

regulator

and

ply power to the 2-cage assembly.

one

H7214

regulator

sup-

VAXEI Card Cage Cables
Description
18"

cage

DWMBA'B
2

slot

t¢

DWMBA'B

(segment

C2)

ACDC

VAXBI

cable.

cage

from

slot

VAXBI

(eseg-

ment C1).
17-01149-01

Firmware console-gnable jumper (on Ethernet adapter slot, alot 6, segment E1)

17-01458-02

VAXBI! ground strap

17-01496-01

Ethernet (from slot 6, segment E2, to H7214 (+13V) and to Etherpet port)

17.01523-01

VAXBI +/-12V t0 J3 on H7215

17-01569-01

DWMBA, from slot 1, segment C1, to J11 of H7206

17-01897-01

15 DWMBA cables for expander cabinet, from XMI slots C,B. 1, and 2 as
needed (segments D and E) to VAXBI cages 3, 4, 5, and 6 slot 1 (segments D and £/ Two per DWMBA.

17-01897-02

7" DWMBA cables, from XM slot E (segments D and E) to VAXBI cage
2 slot 1 (segments D and E). Two per DWMBA

17-01897-03

25" DWMBA cables, from XM] slot D (segments D and E) to VAXBI cage
1 glot 1 tsegmer28 D and E). Two per DWMBA.

17-01920-01

AC/DC OK ceble, from VAXBI elot 1, segment C1. Installed in system to provide for expansion to VAXBI expander cabinet.

VAXBI Card Cage

8&-&

8.1.3 VAXBI Card Cage Subassemblies
Table 8-3 lists the part numbers for FRUs of the VAXBI car
1
cage assembly in the VAX 6000-400 system.

VAXBI Card Cage Subassemblies

3 __@ () uuubfi@ Q!o

Figure 8-3:

msb-0109-89

8-86

VAX 60u0~400 Options and Mainienance

’

Table 8-3: VAXBI Subassemblies and Tools Required
Item

Part Number

Description

12-28508-01

+5V/+5VBB/Ground VAXREI bus bars

12-28342-01

-5.2V VAXBI bus bara

12-28345-01

-2V VAXBI bus bars

20-24486.01

Near end (GIF)

20-24487-01

Far end (GOM)

VAXBI Node IDo

12-23701-17

Set of 16

Transition Header

12-22246-01

Three-segment /O header

Foam Air Seals

74-34536-01

Three pieces of foam used for air seals

Bus Bar Assembly

Terminators

74-34536-02

74-34536-03

Tools Required:

VAXBI Tool Kit

A2-M1094-10

Includes:
Torque screwdnver
Offset ratchet acrewdriver

Large and emall Phillipe screwdrivers
Small Phillips screw-bolding screwdnver
or one with magnetic tip
Flat acrewdnver

VAXBI! Card Cage

8-7

8.2 VAXBI Card Cage Removal
The two VAXBI card cages are bolted together and must
be removed as a unit. Remove them from the front of the
cabinet after you disconnect connections &t the backplane.
You must remove the system control assembly before you
can remove the VAXBI card cage assembly (see Chapter 8
for instructions).

8.2.1 Prepare for Removal
Prepare the system for shutdown. Set up 2 work space
nearby where you can store the modules and work on the
VAXBI card cages.

Label and disconnect the signal and

power connections.

Figure 8-4:

VAXBI Backplane Cables and Power Connections

msb-0192R-89

8-8

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The VAXBI card cage assembly, which contains both cages, slides out the
front of the system cabinet. Before attempting to remove the assembly,
detach cables from other system components that go to the backplanes of
both cages.

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Pull the circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off position.

Unplug the machine.

NOTE: You must first remove the system control assembly, see Chapter
8 for the removal procedure.
Open the rear cabinet door.
6.

Drop the /O panel to expose the card cages.
CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.
NOTE: Figure 8—4 shows the end to disconnect for each of the following

cables.

7. Remove all connectors from segmentis C, D, and E of the transition
headers.

For the CIBCA and KDB50, instead of removing cables,

remove the transition headers from the card cage, since the /O segment
is a permanent part of the transition header. To do this, remove the

top and bottom screws, and then remove the header.
8.

Disconnect the cable to the H7215 power regulator (17-01523-01).
(Remove connector from the regulator.)

Disconnect the harness to the H7214 power regulator.
(On the
regulator, remove the four screws that fasten the harness to the
regulator.)

10. Disconnect the Ethernet line to the H7214 regulator (17-01525-01) from
each cage with a DEBNI adapter. (Remove connector from the lower
half of J1 on the H7214 regulator. This connection is not shown on
Figure 8-4.)
11. Disconnect the ground strap from each cage to the chassis (17-0145802).

VAXBI Card Cage

8-9

8.2.2 Removal of VAXBI Card Cages from Cabinet
Before removing the cages from the cabinel, remove all
modules and sai them aside.

VAXBI Card Cages

{30

Tilluil]

Figure 8-5:

FRONT

\G)/

8-10

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

meb-0111-89

Open the front cabinet door and lift it from its hinges to provide more
clearance.

Remove the clear plastic door in front of the VAXBI cage area.
CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.

Lift up the levers to remove modules. Put them in protective bags and
note which slots they had been in.

Remove and save the four mounting screws that fasten the VAXBI
assembly to the chassis (see Figure 8-5 for location of these screws).
Pull the cages out of the system cabinet carefully so that you do not
damage the power harnesses or bus bars.

VAXB! Card Cage

8-11

@ “ w3 2 £

= >< @ O & o ® 0

The following sections contain directions for switching a
cage.

Figure 8-6:

VAXBI Bus Bar Assembly

msb-0112-89

8-12

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

8.3.1 Removal of VAXBI Bus Bars
On ONLY the cage that needs to be swapped out of the two-cage assembly,
remove the bus bars in the following order:
1.

First remove the +5V/+5VBB/Ground bus bar assembly (12-28508-01),

Nexteremove the -5.2V and -2V bus bars (5 screws into the power cubes).

D:sogmect the +/-12V connection (17-01523-01) te the H7215 regulator.

14 screws. See @ in Figure 8-6.

See

©.

Use a small Phillips screwdriver (#6-32 screws).
detailed view of the VAXBI bus bar assembly.

See Figure 8-6 for a

VAXBI Card Cage

8-13

8.3.2 Removal of Other VAXBI Parts
Remove the node ID plugs, the terminators, and the
mounting plates from the old cage (see Figure 8-7 for their
locations).

Figure 8-7:

VAXBI Backplane Components

TG'gRMINATOR

%IMNATOR

—@,'@ @ @
l)
]
g

0'j®° ®° ®° @° e)'@
=

S g
med-0113-89

d-14

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

@ in Figure 8-7.
Remove the node ID plugs. See

2. Remove the terminators by removing the two screws. See &.
Remove the side and inner mounting plate so that you can slide the
defective cage away from the remaining cage. For the inside plate,

in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8:

VAXB! Cage Mounting Piates

msd-0114-89

VAXBI Card Cage

8-15

8.2.3 Installation of VAXBI Parts
Install the terminators, node ID plugs, and bus bar assembly
taken from the old cage. Attach the side and inner mounting
plates. Finally, install new foam air seals.

Figure 8-9:

Instaliation of Foam Alr Seals

mgb-0115-89

8-16

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

1. On the replacement cage.
install the parts that you removed from the
cage:
defective VAXBI card

Terminators

Node ID plugs

Bus bar assembly, in the reverse order of the removal.
acrews to 9 (+/-1) inch-pounds.

Side and inner mounting plates

Three foam air seals need replacement: the top front of the backplane

and the bottom surfaces of the cages, back and front.
Figure 8-9.

Torque

See @ in

The new cage, the H9400-AA, is shipped with six transition headers
installed. For the slots that are to hold the CIBCA and KDB50 options,
remove the transition headers.

VAXB| Card Cage

8~17

8.4 VAXBI Card Cage Replacement
Return the two-cage assembly to the system. Reattach
all the connections on the backplane, install the screws
sttaching the cage to the chassis, and then put the modules
back into their slots (see Figure 8-10).

Figure 8-10:

VAXBI Card Cages

Qit:

\
e

FRONT

8-18

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

The VAXBI cege assembly should be installed in the cabinet as follows:
1.

Shde the VAXBI card cages into the system cabinet taking care not to

damage the power harnesses or bus bars. You will also need to pull the

cages from the back.

Install the four mounting screws that secure the VAXBI cage assembly

to the sysiem cabinet. See & in Figure 8-10.

Reinstall the syatem control assemnbly (see Chapter 8 for instructions).

Screw on the transiiion headers containing the CIBCA and KDB50
cables. Tighten the screws in stages: do not tighten one completely
before tightening the other. Torque both screws to 6 (+/-1) inch-pounds,
using the torque screwdriver.

Attach the other signal connections in the /O area.
6.

Reattach the power connections.

At the H7214 regulator, torque screws to 27 (+/-5) inch-pounds.
On the bus bars torque screws to 9 (+/-1) inch-pounds.
7.

Put the IO bulkhead tray back into place at the rear of the cabinet.

CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the
cabinet when you handle any modules.

Insert the modules into the VAXBI card cages
Replace the clear door.

10. Turn on system power and check that all nodes pass self-test.
11

Rehang the front cabinet door.

NOTE: See the Verification chapter in the VAX 6000-400 Installation
Guude for complete acceptance instructions.

VAXBI Card Cage

8-19

8.5 VAXBI Expansion and Configuration Rules
The system cabinet has two VAXBI cages configured to
provide two VAXBI channels for V0. One of the six glots
holds the XMl-to-VAXBI! adapter module, leaving five glots
for 'O modules. Four more cages can be installed in a
VAXBI expander cabinet to provide four additional VAXBI
channels, for a total of six VAXBI channels. A total of 30
slots is available for VO adapters.

Figure 8~11:

Numbering of VAXB! Slots

DWMBA/B

L~ MoDuULE

msb-0117.89

8-20

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

‘

The cage and backplane were designed so that any module or node can
reside in any slot (except slot 1). On the VAXBI bus, the module that drives
the clock must reside in the first slot (see Figure 8-11 for the numbering of
VAXBI slots). In the VAX 6000400 system the DWMBA/B module of the

XMI-to-VAXBI adapter drives the clock and therefore must reside in slot 1.
VAXBI node numbers derive from node ID plugs that plug into the
backplane. A node, which can be more than one module, is assigned the

node number of the plug that is inserted into the slot of the module with
the VAXBI Corner. Multimodule nodes must be in adjacent slots.
Constraints on adding VAXBI options include:
¢

Power requirements for the options

Memory latency time needed to access MS62A memory

See the VAX Systems and Options Catalog for VAXBI option configurations
in VAX 6000-400 systems. See Appendix B of the VAXBI Options Handbook
for power requirements of various options. The DWMBA/B module requires
6 amps.

VAXBI Card Cage

8-21

8.6 VAXBI Troubleshooting
When you install modules in the VAXBI card cages, several
items need to be checked. Table 84 gives a checklist of items
to troubleghoot.

Table 8-4:

VAXBI Troubleshooting Checklist

Symptom

Possible Cause

No power to cages

Clear plastic door not in place or not latched.

Intermittent module response

Poor contact at connector
Loose cabling at backplane

Module does not appear on self-

Loose cabling at backplane

test regults

Syetem not configured correctly

8-22

VAX 8000400 Options and Maintenance

The XMI and VAXBI card cages are in back of clear plastic doors.
NOTE: If these doors are opened when power is still on, a power interlock
switch cuts off power from the regulators to either the VAXBI side or to the
XMI side, depending on the door opened.
Before turning power back on, make sure the clear plastic doors are in place
and latched. You can then push the reset switch on the H7206 PAL unit
(see Figure 9-9) to return power to the system.

If you receive intermittent module response, or the module does not show
up on self-test as being present at all, make sure that the module is seated
properly, and check the backplane cabling.
Modules may fail self-test because of poor contact at the connector. A
thorough cleaning of the gold pads on the module and of the connector
in the card cage corrects this contact failure. If the connections seem to be
faulty, clean the contact areas of the connector and module. Table 8-5 hsts
tools and supphes for connector cleaning.

Table 8-5:

VAXBI Connector Cleaning Supplies

Item

Part

Number

Function

VAXBI tool Int

A2-M1094-10

Maunteuning card cages

Paddie wipe hapdle

47-00116-02

Holding paddle wipes

Paddle wipes

12-26321-01

Ct;l::mng contact area inside ZIF connec-

Gold-wipesTM

49.01603-00

Cleaning module connector contact area

Protective goggles

29-16141-10

Eye protection

Nitrile gloves

29-26403-00

Hand protection

TMGold-wipes 16 a trademark of TEXWIPE

VAXBI Card Cage

8-23

DO R0 000.0.0.0.0.0.090.9:9.9.0:0.¢.9'0.0.:0.9.¢0.0.0,6:8.0.9.0.0.6,0..00,86.90.9.¢.90.8:
POV NG00 0600 0.00 0.0.0:8.8/00.090.966000.89.80968000909]
PO 6 9000000000000 0000000000068 90:00:0.60090000.¢89004

1670.0:010,0.0.0.0.4.0.9.6:0.10.8.6:9.9:010.9.0,0:0.0.0.6.0:9.0.8.0.0,0.0.0,0.0.9.0,9,¢;9.
NS00 EDHO GO008:0.0.9.9,0:¢9.0.9:6.9.9.9.0:¢.0.0.4.0:0.8.09.69¢91
HKARKKKAXAZ KK AR KHR R ALK H AL AR AR K AR KK KL IAAXX
3.0.96.¢9.9
LD 0.010.8:0:0.0.6.0.8:0.6:0.6.918:6,9¢.99.09999989
FA D005 0 0.0:0.0:89.6:09.9:0:0.¢:5.0.$.0,0.0.9:¢.9.6,9.0.9¢.8.0.04

E:9:0.0:0.9:0:00.010.0.40.6.80.0.0:08989.9.9¢9:000.9.0.9
b o09010:06:0:4:0:6:08:0.0.8:6.5.08.9:$.:6,80.90.8,9.9¢8

1060101005:910:5:6.¢.19:8.018,6,0:0.9.8:6,6:0:0:¢.9,9.94
0,0:0.9:0.0,619.0.9.89,6:4:0.0.6,0,¢0.90.¢¢8000
:0:0.0.910.010:0:0:0.0.6:14,8,0.0.0.9.9,9.0.0,¢9.¢.9.1

:0:810:9.0:9:9:9:9.4.9:0:0.0.0.0.9,0.4,9,9.9.6.9¢
3004 0 6:9.0:0:9.9.9.0.6.8.9.9,¢.8.9.9.¢
119:9:0:9:0.0.6.4.:9.0:5.816.26.:0.9.¢,¢¢

}0:810.0:0.0.¢:0:6.9.0.¢:9.0.9.0.9.4.4

EO0:0,4:0:9.8:0.0.0:0.0.0:.0:4.8¢
.4
1:6/9:0.9.0,9.9:9:9.9,0.9.6
b019.9.9.¢.9:4:0:9.69.04
R AHEAYHHHEX
HHAKKKHKK

MU HKKKK
0,9:9.9.4

XHX
X

KAXXX

XAHKKRK

.4
19.9.0:0.9:0.4,9
)9.4.9.0.0.8.0:0
9,94

}i9:9.:9.9:9:8:9.9.4.8.9:0.4

0,9 .9 ¢
189.0.0:0:0.8.9.9.9.
9.9:0.9.9.0,0.0.9.8,¢.9.0.¢.9,¢1

Pi6,9.4.8.9.0.6:4,9.0.9,0.0.8.¢.9.6¢.¢

b .4¢.9:010.6:.9.9.9:0.0,0.98.9.08.0.9¢

1:0,010.6:0.6.0.9:0.4,8:6,0.0..8.9.9.8.8.9,0

P $10:010.9:0.0.0.0:0.6.0.0..9.9,,0.8.0.9.4,0

2.9 &9,
0:010.6:0,0°0:9:0.0.0109.0.9.0.:0,0,0.8.9:¢
5.
F/8:0.01¢0.0/0:9:0.¢:0.9:0,0.9.0.6.0.0.8.9.8.8.0.9,9

P9/00.8709:0.0:0.0.9,0.:0.0.6.0:9.419.0.4.0.0.0.0,0,0.9.¢.¢,

P070.91070:0:0:0:0.9.0.8.$.9.0.6:9.9.0.0:.,0,0.0.0.8.0.3.0,9.0.9,
P070:9/0.0:0:0:8.00..:0:0:9.0.9.8.0.0.09:0.9.09.8.0.8.6.8.0.9.6¢

FAR S 0.00:0.8.0.0.0.8.9.0.0,00.8.6.0.40.0.0.0.85.0,¢:$0:00089
0.9 %9,
PO 0000.0.00.9:0.00.¢.0'0.5.:0:0:0.0.6:3.9.6.¢,019.¢:0.9:4.0.9.8.

08.9,
0.010.8
600,640 ¢9.0.808.0.50.849
NOS AR 019:90:080.59:9:
9,
93880680805
0.8:9.0:0.0.9:00.0
060005 0t
NSO PP
889080999
0:0.0.8:0.0.9:0:08000
D60
REBV S CECEL O NS¢0
SIS OPR GO

GO0 000061001000.96.9.0:0.00:¢:9:0.0.90.6,9.09.0.9.9.¢

XEXX XX KX KK AR XK KU KA RERA KR LK AR KX KA XX KA KKK K XA LKRAX
880899
E VOO0 0408.0:0.8.0.0.0000900000008
RSOV

Chapter 9

Control Subsystem Assemblies
This chapter describes the specificaiions and maintenance of the system
control assempiy and its subassemblies. Sections include:
System Control Assembly Specifications

System Control Assembly Removal and Replacement
XTC Power Sequencer Specifications
XTC Removal and Replacement

Control Panel Assembly Specifications

Control Panel Assembly Removal and Replacement
TK Tape Drive Specifications

TK Tape Drive Removal and Replacement
Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Specifications

Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Removal and Replacement

Contro! Subsystem Assemblies

9-1

9.1 System Control Assembly Specifications
The system control assembly is located in the upper left
front corner of the cabinet. It houses the separate FRUs
of the control panel, TK tape drive, the XTC, and the battery
powering the TOY clock. The eystem control assembly’s part
number is 70-24803-01.

Figure 8-1:

{

System Control Assembly

SYSTEM ASSEMBLY

CONTROL
|

FRONT

SEQUENCER

CLOCK
TOY
BATTERY

] of
S

TK70

DRIVE
TAPE
ASSEMBLY

XTC POWER

FWLTER
BOARD

CONTROL
PANEL

ASSEMBLY

8-2

——

VAX 6000~400 Options and Maintenance

eb-0033-89

Table 9-1:

System Control Assembly Specifications

Paremeter

Description

Part Number:

70-24903-01

Location:

Upper left front

Dimensions:

1125"Hx 85 Wx 175" D

Weight:

18 Tbs, with TK and control panel installed

Siignal Cables:

17-01814-01 from the control assembly shield leading to the TBK70
adapter’s slot at VAXB] backplane segment D
Front and rear of cabinet, front door removed

Tools Required:

Large and small Phillips screwdrivers

SBubassemblies:

Control panel assembly (54-16574-01)
XTC power sequencer (54-17243-01 or 20-29176-01)
TK tape dnve (TK70-AA)
TOY 3-cell battery (12-19245-02)

Diagnoetics:

Control panel assembly hights will hght when the control assembly 18 correctly installed.

Control Subsystem Assemblies

8-3

9.2 System Control Assembly Removal and
Replacement

Working mainly from the front of the cabinet, remove or
replace the system control assembly using a large and small
Phillips screwdriver.
The assembly has four screws on
the front of the assembly, two screws on the back of the
assembly, and one cable.
Figure 8-2:

System Control Assembly Removal
/

\9;

meb-0064-80

Ll
A S

REMOVAL

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

8-4

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Turn the control panel upper key switch to the Off position.

Pull the circuit breaker switch and unplug the machine.

Open and remove the front door. (See Section 11.1.) Open the rear door.

Remove the four power cords (orange, black, red, and black) from the
back of the console assembly using a large Phillips screwdriver. ( See

Section 7.2.)

Remove the four screws from the corners of the XTC power sequencer
module (see Section 94) and lay the XTC down with all of its
connections in place.
Remove signal cable 17-01814-01 from the upper right corner of the
back of the console assembly This cable is the control from the TK
tc VAXBI backplane segment D, at the slot housing the TK's TBK70
adapter.
Working from the rear of the cabinet, loosen the two #10-32 screws with
a large Philbps screwdnver.
Move to the front of the cabinet. Remove the two #10-32 screws on
the left side of the console assembly using a large Phillips screwdniver.

10. Supporting the control assembly with one hand,

loosened screw with your hand.

remove the last

11. Using both hands, carefully pull the control assembly forward and out

of the cabinet. See @®.

REPLACEMENT
1

Install the XTC and the control panel assembly (see Section 9.4 and
Section 9.6,

As you guide the control assembly into the front o” the cabinet, push
the control assembly all the way to the left. This will align the screws
w1th their holes in the structure. If you have trouble closing the cabinet
door. check the assembly alignment.
3

Reverse steps 1 through 8 in the Removal section above.

Control Subsystem Assemblies

8-5

9.3 XTC Power Sequencer Specifications
The XTC power sequencer is mounted on the back of the
system control assembly. It is wired to the XMI backplane,
the console terminal, the TK tape drive, and the H7214
power regulator.

Figure 8-3:

XTC Power Sequencer

—8

XTC POWER

RE AR

SEQUENCER

mab-0065-83

8-6

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Tabie 8-2:

XTC Power Sequencer Speclfications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

54-17243-01 or 20-29176-01

Location:

Upper right rear, mounted on the beck of the system control assem-

bly

Dimensions:

25"Wx8 Hx .06"D

Weight:

Less than 1 Ib

Power:

+5VBB at 0.6 amps

+12V at 1.0 amps
-12V at 0.1 ampe

Cablas:

Four ribbon cables and one TOY clock battery cable:
12-19245-02 battery cable, J1 connector with red plug end
17-01498-01 XTC to H72086, J3 14-pin connector
17-01567-01 XTC w console port, J5 10-pin connector
17-01568-02 XM] to XTC, J4 20-pin connector, 56" long
17-01816-01 XTC to control panel, J2 connector

Bervice From:

Rear of cabinet, door removed

Tools Raquired:

Large Phillips screwdnver

Subaseemblies:

None

Diagnostics:

Power indicator hights on the control pane! will bght and the con-

trol panel key switches will
quencer 18 correctly installed

turn

when

the

XTC

power

Control Subsystem Assemblies

ge-

9-7

9.4 XTC Removal and Replacement
Remove or replace the XTC power sequencer from the rear
of the cabinet.

Figure 8-4:

9-8

XTC Power Sequencer Removal

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

IR
o A

REMOVAL

Execute an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the control panel upper key switch to the Off position.
Pull the drcuit breaker switch.

Unplug the system.

Open the front and rear doors.
Wearing a ground strap, disconnect the 17-01568-02 ribbon cable at

J4 which is a 20-pin connector cable leading to the XMI. See ® in
Figure 94.

Disconnect the 17-01498-01 ribbon cable at J3 which is a 14-pin

connector cable leading to the H7206 power and logic box. See @.

Disconnect the 17-01567-02 ribbon cable at J5 which is a 10-pin

Disconnect the 17-01816-01 nbbon cable at J2 which leads to the control

10. Disconnect the

1.-19245-02 lead with a red plug end at the Jl
connector; the cable leads to the TOY clock battery in the system control
assembly.

11. Use a large Phillips screwdriver to remove the four #6-32 screws located

on each corner of the XTC power sequencer. See @.

12. Pull the XTC toward you and remove.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 th.rough 12 in the Removal section above.
Reset the TOY clock.

Control Subsystem Assemblies

©-9

9.5 Control Panel Assembiy Specifications
The control panel assembly (54-16574-01) i¢ in the upper left
front of the cabinet.

Figure 8-5:

Controi Panel Assombiy

CONTROL PANEL
ASSEMBLY

8-10

E—

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

mgd-0067-89

Table 9-3:

Control Panel Assembly Speclfications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

54.1£574-01

Location:

Front upper left corner

Dimensions:

425" Wx275"Hzx175"D

Weight:

Less than 5 Ibe

Cables:

;7;(‘)1181 8-01 cable from the J1 20-pin connector to the saasembly bulke

Service From:

Front of cabinet, door open

Tools Reguired:

Large Phillips screwdnver

Subassemblies:

None

Diagnostics:

Control pane] assembly hghta Light when power ie turned on by the
contro] pane] kev switch

Control Subsystem Assemblies

8-11

9.6 Control Panel Assembly Removal and
Replacement
Working frorm the front of the cabinet, remove the control
panel assembly using a large Phillips screwdriver. The panel
assembly has one cable, 17-01818-01.

T
A—

@
e

———

- ———————

-j_.

Control Panel Assembly Removal

Figure 8-6:

msb-0068-80

8-12

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

. Conduct an orderly shutdown of the system.

oW
e

REMOVAL

Turn the control panel upper key switch to the Off position.

Pull the circuit breaker switch.
Unplug the machine. Open the front door.

Using a large Phillips screwdriver, remove the two #6-32 screws on the

Swing the unit out and to the left, and pull it toward you. See @.
Disconnect cable 17-01818-01 at the J1 20-pin connector. See @.

REPLACEMENT

Connect the power cord to J1. The connection is not keyed, so look at
the pins and the receptacle and align them carefully as you connect the
cord.

Place the tabs on the left edge of the control panel in the slots on the

control assembly.

With the tabs inserted, swing the module into the opening.

Using alarge Phillips screwdriver, insert and tighten two #6-32 screws.
Close the front door.

Control Subsystem Assemblies

9-13

9.7 TK Tape Drive Specifications
The TK tape drive is located in the system control assembly
in the upper left front of the cabinet, part number TK70-AA.
Figure 8-7:

TK Tape Drive

FRONT

TK70

TAPE DRIVE

ASSEMBLY

——

msb-0066-89

g-14

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 9—4:

TK Tape Drive Assembly Specilfications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

TK70-AA

Location:

Upper left front, boused in the system control sesembly

Dimensions:

580" Wx 338 Hx879"D

Weight:

5.13 Ibe

Power:

One

power

cord

17-01817.01

the

Cable:

One

&gnal

cord

17-01813-0!

from

Service From:

Front of cabinet, door removed

Tools Required:

None

Subassemblies:

None

Diagnostics:

All
tic

system

control

sssem-

bly, which connecta to 17-01814-0]1 leading to the TBK70 adepter 1n
the VAXBI]
ter board

connector J7

to the

three LEDs on TK70 are lit when power-up
15 1n progress,
tape-in-use LED (yellow) hghts
cate tape 18 ready for use.

fil-

diagnosto ind:-

Control Subsystem Assembiies

$-15

9.8 TK Tape Drive Removal and Replacement
Working from the front of the cabinet, remove or replace the
TK using the spring clip attached to the control assembly
unit on the right. The TK has one power and one signal
cable.
Figure 8-8:

TK Tape Drive Removal
)

e ek
§ TS

—

meb-0070-89

8-16

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

A
A

REMOVAL

Turn the control panel upper key switch to the Off position.
Open the front door.

Push the spring clip to the right. See ® in Figure 9-8.
Pull the TK out toward you. See &
Holding the unit in your hand, disconnect power cord 17-01817-01

Disconnect the signal cable 17-01813-01 at J7 on the TK70. See ®.

REPLACEMENT
e

Reverse steps 1 through 6 above, being careful not to twist the signal
cable.

®*

As you push the unit 1n, hold the signal cable flush to the left side of
the unut so that the service loop remains untangled and is installed
smoothly Tuck the end loop in if 1t protrudes when the TK unit is
installed

Control Subsystem Assemblies

%17

9.9 Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery
Specifications
The filter board and TOY clock battery are located on the
inside floor of the control assembly in the upper lef: front of
the cabinet. The battery is a 3-cell TOY clock battery, part
rumber 12-19245-02, and it powers the time-of-year clock

on the XTC power sequencer module. The filter board part
number iz 54-18547-01.
Figure 8-8:

Fliter Board and TOY Clock Battery

FRONT

TOY CLOCK

BATTERY
FILTER

BOARD

map 071-8¢

8-18

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Teble 9-5: Flliter Board Specifications
Parameter

Description

Part Number:

54-18547-01

Location:

Inmde of system control assembly

Dismensions:

31415 U4

Weight:

Less than 1lb

Ceable:

17-01812-01 to XM! backplane

Service From:

Inmde of system coatrol assembly

Tools Required:

Large Philhipe screwdriver

Diagnostics:

TK hghts

Table 9-6:

17-01813-01 to the TK70 tape drive

TOY Clock Battery Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

12-19245-02

Location:

Inmde of system control mssembly

Dimensions:

134 32112

Weight:

Less than 11b

Power:

3-cell,

Cable:

Lead to XTC power sequencer

Service From:

Front of cabinet, door removed

Tools Required:

None

Diagnostics:

Tune-of-vear clock works

375V, .18mA

Control Subsystem Assemblies

©-19

9.10 Filter Board and TOY Clock Battery Removal
and Repiacement
To remove or replace the filter board or the 3-cell time-ofyear clock battery, first remove the system control assembly
{see Section 8.2). Then remove the side panel of the system
control assembly.

Figure 8-10:

Fliter Board and TOY Clock Battery Removal

TOY CLOCK

BATTERY

mab-0081-89

e-20

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

REMOVAL OF FILTER BOARD
Remove the system control assembly (see Section 9.2).
Using a large screwdriver, unscrew the side panel of the system control

assembly. See @ in Figure 9-10.

Remove the screw from each corner of the filier board, using a large

Disconnect cable 17-01813-01 from J7 at the back of the TK70 tape

Disconnect cable 17-01812-01 which leads to the XMI backplane. See

©. Working from the inside of the system control assembly, gently pull
the cable through the ferrite bead at the rear of the system control
assembly.

Lift the filter board up and out of the system control assembly.

REPLACEMENT OF FILTER BOARD
Reverse steps 1 through 6 above.

REMOVAL OF TOY CLOCK BATTERY
1

Remove the system control assembly (see Section 9.2).

Using a large screwdriver, unscrew the side panel of the system control

assembly. See @ in Figure 9-10.

To remove the battery, disconnect the 2-pin battery lead at J1 on the
XTC power sequencer. Push the battery up and out of the plastic holder,
pulling the lead through the system control agsembly shielding.

REPLACEMENT OF TOY CLOCK BATTERY
1

To replace the battery, snap it into the holder and connect the lead at
J1 on the XTC power sequencer.

Reverse steps 1 and 2 above.

Control Subsystem Assemblies

8-21

0806000008080 0.000080808000686648600880800868666486090]
}0.0.9.6.0.0.6.4 00096908080000008008800000080808088084$644
§.0.0.9.0.6.¢800040¢0068080008800800008008090.800¢04:
}0.9.¢:9.6.8.90.900.0.0.6¢680686800000808000008080808894¢9¢4
b0 0000804004848 ¢868000880088000080¢0800 ¢4
b OO0

0800048.88.006000000009880898¢908004

19.0.90.9.00.¢.990600006600800008006008980800¢94
}0.0:0.5.9.9.6:4.6,0.4.05.$.0.8.08.¢6800.9600.08880090984
F00:0.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.6.6858.0.868600800080808¢84
19:9.0.9.0.0.0.9.8.9¢800.90.8.060000004688800001

1O G0 0009:0.9.000.0.600006048006¢¢0.44

fi0.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0000¢0608 606860003

D0°8.4.9.0.0.09.80690.068¢008694¢04!
b0.0.0.8.0.08.00§0000060649¢480.¢4
D9.0.0.6.0.60¢6908000060608434
HAXX KX XAUALRE
XK IR KKK
0.0.0.0.3.0.9.60.009 0006804
. 0.9:0.9.0.9.0,¢¢0.¢006000,4
L.0.6.4,6.:0.0:6.06.609.0¢4

b0.8:0.9.9.4,0.¢.8.4.¢9
10608090609

HAAKKAHXX
1.6.9.¢.9.0,64

19,9094
XXX
X

XXXXX
XXXXXXX
OO

19.9.9.0.6.6.6.9.0.94
YOOI
XX XXX X

XX OOOOOCOOX
XX

994
$9.8.9.0.9.06.9.40.6.6.63
00.4.6.8.0.089088998808¢4]
AU AAXR XU KX KL XAKA LXK
J.0.9.0.9.0.00.8.40.00.¢96.096¢6094]
$9.0.0.9.08,0.888¢00008080806006!
pE5.0.4.0.8.080840.85080880.060000!
160,680,009 ¢6000004699060480904]
F 0880600808 0800000900980860400600

pO.00.0800000.060000080800 00048088804
}9.00.40.0¢0900.809096609¢80008005869849)

§0.4.0.9.9.9.0.0.6.0¢.9900.0 080000088088 88086809]
b0 0 0804848848600008008690988806800000804]
10.8.0,9.0.0.0.6.0.8.606.6¢89600.090.06004888040080060469¢]
1$.0.0.08.6.090.089.0.460.9900.0:90409090964884806000964]
}9.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.90.0:4.6,0.8.060.6.0.0.8.0.50.8.9.009.60909.046400¢00600
$9:0.0.0.0:0.9.9.9.8.0.0.090.896.04.800.0.¢$99080008¢90666¢80¢
¢4
16.9.00.6.0.6.0.0:0.00.0.0.0.9.0.0.6000.69¢.8.¢.06.90¢$09080896.080808949
$9.0.6.9.0.00.80.6.595.0.00.069.068909.908¢.965.00060400880840004¢060004]

Chapter 10

Power Subsystem
This chapter gives specifications and removal and replacement procedures
for the power modules. Figure 10-1 shows a block diagram of the power
subsystem design.

Sections in this chapter include:
Power Subsystem Design
Power Specifications
Power Modules

H7214 Power Regulator

H7214 Power Regulator Removal and Replacement
H7215 Power Regulator

H7215 Power Regulator Removal and Replacement
H7206 Power and Logic Unit

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Removal and Replacement
H7206 Fan Removal and Replacement
H405 AC Power Controller

H405 AC Power Controller Removal and Replacement
50 Hz Transformer

50 Hz Transformer Removal and Replacement
H7231-N Cattery Backuo Umt

H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Removal and Replacement
H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Installation

Power Subsystem

10-1

10.1 Power Subsystem Design
Figure 10-1 is a block diagram of the VAX 6000-400 power

subsystem.

Figure 10-1:

Power Subsystem Deasign
Biovwos
1V e
BLOWER FAUL
—
[
Fae ¢

280V AC or Q1CV AC iopes pover

fe roduced to 200 ¥ AC vith e8
opticacl outotrancformer

3-Phase

|Pever

Szel-

Cea-

’

l ?4

24V BC

| I'———{
o

——

r—
———

—

P2C Pover Bua —‘

Toaperatute Sonser

Dpiiess) 07231 50OV X BN

20 A

«13v

g &

-3V

Pover

Doerd

T A

-_—

300V D¢

8.0

H7218

-1V 2.8

fo Il ———t

Cerd Cege

Bv 120 A

87214

VB8 130 A

BYa14

18 BV 0.6 A

138v06A

300V OC
P
—————
S

-6Y

Te YARS! —J
Cord Coges

30 4

i3
4 &
~13V 2.5 A

11)

134 ]

} 120 A

196V 0.6 A

10-2

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

/
\

g7318

ny2ie

Contrel Fanel

Key Bwitch

j
M7306 Fover amod Logic Umat

- BULK/AC Somse —
——

eigV DC

‘

b-on cup ¢~

Logic Aoare

— 13V BHVTDIVN

S-S TANDBY CHD L
)

—

BYRL

— GYNL f
—

DEC

41E PAULT

— TWMIBIT

Bus

‘

‘
3

LYT71 ITT—TTIT TTT1 l

Powsr

AN NN

‘

—

A RS RS an e

OVERTE®P |
SH L IWNIFIT
$vaC 4 1

1§

¥V

em=mcmmcmueommnd

CH 7 TWRID]Y o

SYHE a4
CH

{

—

commemc——

|
et

=14 vV OC

§Yus &

1RERARALARD

IwMIRZY

CAEINET JWTBRLOEK § IWHIBIT ——memed
oM 4 X

*)g v OC

-J

ovERTERP 3

€N o INNIBIT
-

BYNC B 4

'
§

m—

e1a V Of

BYHC B &

C# 6 INHIBLY

CADIWEY IMTERLOCK 2 IwHIEBIT

has

"“‘-J

e
)

“

Power Subsystem

10-3

10.2 Power Specifications
Figure 10-2 shows the physical arrangement of the power
regulators in the cabinet. Table 10-1 and Table 10-2 list the
DC output voltages the power regulators supply to the XMl
and VAXBI card cages. AC output specifications are listed
in Table 10-3.

DC Power Regulators In Cabinet (Rear View)
VAXBI

A
H7215

o0
e
H7214

o O

O O

o (1

| ox::ar:::::JT\ .

XMI

D =]
1

E [~1 #]

@
A

o]
H7214

o
o

Figure 10-2:

AR N
o

D
H7215

E
H7214
msb-0073-8%

104

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-1: XMl Side—DC Output Specifications
DC Voltage

Current

For:

From Regulator(s):

+12V

RS-232 and TK tape drive sup-

-12V

25A

RS-232 supply

20 A

ECL logic

-2V

ECL logic

+5V

120 A

Logic supply

+13.5V

05A

Ethernet transceiver B

+5VBB

120 A

Memory supply

+13.5V

05A

Ethernet transceiver C

Table 10-2:

VAXBI Side—DC Output Specifications

DC Voltage!

Current

+12V

4 A

.12V

ply

For:

From Regulator(s):

RS-232 and TK tape dnve sup-

25A

RS-232 supply

20A

ECL lognc

ECL logc

+5V

120 A

Logic supply

+5VBB

120 A

Memory supply

+13.5V

05A

Ethernet transaceiver E

ply

'The H7206 power and logic unut supples 24VDC at 0-4 amps to the blowers and murflow senBOT.

Table 10-3:

AC Output Specifications

Type

For:

Two switched external JEC 320 recepta.
cles fused at 10 amps }

Reserved

One unswitched internal IEC 320 recep-

H7231-N battery backup option

tacle fused at 2 amps

YThese receptacles are not included on some systems.

Power Subsystem

10-5

10.3 Power Modules
Most of the power modules can be seen from the rear of the
coLinet.

Figure 10-3:

H7214 & H7215
POWER
REGULATORS

Location of Power Modules (Rear View)

]

H7206 POWER
H7231 BATTERY

BACKUP UNIT

(OPTIONAL)

AND LOGIC UNIT

—

H405 AC POWER
CONTROLLER
meb-0074.88

10-6

VAX 5000400 Options and Maintenance

Power modules are listed in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4:
Part

Power Modules
60 Hz

50 Hz

Power regulator

H7206

Power and logic umit

H7231-N

Battery backup umt

H405-E

AC power controller

H405-F

AC power controller

16-28393-01

50 Hz wansformer

Number

Module

Quantity

H7214

Power regulator

H7215

System

Power Subsystem

10-7

10.4 H7214 Power Regulator
The system has three H7214 power regulators; two supply
power to the XMI backplane and one supplies power to the
VAXBI backplane. Each power regulator can also supply
+13.5V io an Ethermet transceiver.
The regulators are
located in the upper part of the cabinet.

Figure 10-4:

H7214
POWER
REGULATORS

M7214 Po'er Reguiators (Rear View)

—A
1
i

msb-0075-88

10-8

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-5:

K7214 Power Regulator Speclfications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

H7214

Location:

Upper part of cabimet

Dimensions:

6 Hx45 W3x12'D

Weight:

8 1bse

Cables for XMl:

17-01497-02 control/etatue cable, 34-pip connector
17.01446-01 bulk power cable
17-01525-01 remote sense cable
+13.5V output cable, 2-pin connector (part of Ethernet cable 1701496~
ol

+5VDC
biy

Cables for VAXBI:

and

-5VDC

leads

sttached

XMI

bus

bar

sssem-

17-01666-01 control'status cable, 24-pin connector, to H7206 power
and lognc unut

17.01447-0] bulk power cable to H?206 power and logic urut
17-01525-01 remote aense cable to VAXB] bus bar

+13 5V ocutput cable, 2-pin Mate-N-Lck connector ipart of 17-01496(01 Ethernet cable)

+5\VDC

and

-5VDC

leads

attached to VAXBI

bus bar assem-

bly

Service From:

Front and rear of cabinet. doors open

Tools Required:

Flat screwdnver

Disgnostics:

Green LED Lights when +5V output 18 within regulation

The H7214 power regulator develops two regulated DC outputs +5V used
to power svstem logic and memory loads, and the +13.5V, available for an
Ethernet transceiver.

Each H7214 has one green LED that is visible from the rear of cabinet.
The LED lights to indicate that the +5V output 1s properly regulated.
NOTE: The green LED does not indicate the status of the +13.5V Ethernet
output.

The power regulator consists of a single printed circuit board mounied on a
nght-angle bracket. The bracket has guiding edges for use when inserting
the regulator into the cabinet.

Power Subsystem

10-9

105

H7214 Power Regulator Removal and
Replacement
Remove or replace the H7214 power regulator from the rear
of the cabinet.

WARNING: High voltages are present in the H7214 power regulator.
After power has been removed, wait at least 2 minutes before working
on the unit.

Figure 10-5:

10-10

H7214 Power Regulator Removal

VAX 6000~400 Opticns and Maintenance

REMOVAL
N

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to Off.

Pull the main arcuit breaker on the AC power controller to Off.

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Unplug system power cord;, wait 2 minutes for capactors to discharge.

Open the front and rear doors.
At the front of the cabinet. disconnect the bulk power cord by releasing
the fastener chp and puling. On the XMI side. disconnect cable 1701446-01 from J3. On the VAXBI side, disconnect cable 17-01447-01
from J3.
At front of cabinet, loosen one captive screw securing regulator.

At the rear of the cabinet, disconnect the control/status cable by

releasing the fastener clip and pulling.

See @ in Figure 10~5.

the XMI side, disconnect cable 17-01497-02 from J1.
side, disconnect cable 17-01666-01 from J1.

On the VAXBI

Disconnect the 17-01525-01 r. mote sense cable from J4. See ©.
10. Disconnect the +13 5V cord [part of 17-01496-01] from J2 (if Ethernet

connection is present). See (.

'ithma 516" nut dniver, remove the three nuts and the plastic cover.
@
See

12 Disconnect the bus bar leads by removing the four screws. See @ Work

the bus bar leads down 1nto the XM1I service area.

13. Using a flat screwdniver, loosen the four slotted screws.

See (®.

14 Support the bottom of the H7214 as you pull it from the cabinet.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 14 above.
NOTE: Make sure the lugs connecting the bus bar leads do not contact the

sheet metal bracket around the mounting points.

The H7214 ground reference wire is connected to the regulator’s circuit board
and return bus bar by a screw and washer. Make sure the wire is intact
and properly connected. Tuck the wire out of the way when inserting the
regulator into the mach:ne.

Power Subsystem

10-11

10.6 H7215 Power Regulator
The system has two H7215 power regulators, one for the
XMI card cage and one for the VAXBI card cages. They
are located in the upper part of the cabinet, along with the
H7214 power regulators.

Figure 10-6:

H7215 Power Regulators (Rear View)

#7215 POWER ____
REGULATORS —1

|SR
1

msp-0077-89

10-12

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-6:

H7215 Power Regulator Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

H7215

Locstion:

Upper part of cabinet

Dimensionas:

6 Hx365Wx12'D

Weight:

5 lbe

Cables for XMl:

17-01446-01 bulk power cable from H7206, 3-pin connector
17-01497-02 control status cable from H7206,
10-pin connector for mgnals and 2-pin Mste-N-Lok counector for interlock swatch

17-01566-01

power

distmbution

csble

XMI,

32.pin

connec-

tor

Cables for VAXBI:

17.01447.0] bulk power cable for H7206, 3-pin connector
17-01666-01 control'status cable from H7206,
10-pin connector for sgnals and 2-pin Mate-N-Lok connector for the interlock switch

17-01523-01 power distmbution cable to VAXBI, 32.-pin connector

Service From:

Front and rear of cabinet, doors open

Tools Required:

Flat screwdnver

Diagnostice:

Green LED hghts when voltages are 1n regulation

The H7215 develops four regulated DC output voltages: -5V and -2V for
ECL devices and +12V and -12V for communications devices and the TK
tape dnve.

The H7215 has a thermal sensor If the H7215 overheats on the XMI side,
an OVER TEMP signal 1s sent to the H7206 logic board. The H7206 wll
then inhibit all regulator outputs to the XMl The same is true for the
regulators on the VAXBI side.

Each regulator has a green LED that hghts to indicate when all four output
voltages are in regulation. The LEDs are visible from the rear of the
cabinet.

The power regulator consists of a single printed circuit board mounted on a
nght-angle bracket. The bracket has guading edges for use when inserting
the regulator into the system.

Power Subsystem

10-13

10.7 H7215 Power Regulator Removal and
Replacement
Working mainly from the rear of the cabinet, remove or
replace the H7215 power regulator using a flat screwdriver.
The assembly has three captive screws, one control/status
cable, and two power cables.
WARNING: High voltages are present in the H7215 power regulator.
After power has been removed, wait at least 2 minutes before working
on the unit.

Figure 16-7:

10-14

H7215 Power Regulator Removal

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

REMOVAL

Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off
p sition.

NS
o e

Unplug the system power cord.
Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.
Open the front and rear doors.

Working from the rear of the cabinet, disconnect the control/status cable
by pulling out the 10-pin connector at J2 and the 2-pin Mate-N-Lok

connector at INTERLOCK. See @ in Figure 10-7. On the XMI side,

cable 17-01497-02 is disconnected. On the VAXBI side, cable 17-0166601 is disconnected.

Remove the cable retainer and disconnect the power distribution cable
from J3. See @ (Note that this 32-pin connector is keyed.) On the
XMI side, cable 17-01566-01 1s disconnected. On the VAXBI side, cable
17-01523-01 1s disconnected.

At the front of the cabinet, disconnect the bulk power cable from J1.
This cable has a 3-pin Mate-N-Lok connector. On the XMI side, cable
17-01446-01 is disconnected. On the VAXBI side, cable 17-01447-01 1is
disconr- cted.

10 At (he front of the cabinet, loosen the one captive screw securing the
F.7215.

11. At the rear of the cabinet. use a flat screwdriver to loosen the screws

at the top and bottom of the power regulator. See ®.

12. Support the bottom of the H7215 as you pull it out of the cabinet.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 12 above.

Be sure to position the power regulator on the guide rail when you

Note the gray dot on the control/status cable connector. When installing

insert 1t into the cage.

this cable, make sure the dot is on the top side.

Power Subsystem

10-15

10.8 H7206 Power and Logic Unit
10.8.1 Specifications

The H7206 power and logic unit is located in the lower
right rear of the cabinet, just above the H405 AC power
controller.
Figure 10-8:

H7206 Power and Logic Unlt (Rear View)

—

H7206 POWER
AND LOGIC UNIT

mgb-0075-88

10-16

VAX 6000~400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10~7: H7206 Power and Loglc Unlit Specifications
Parameter

Deecription

Part Number:

H7206

Location:

Lower nght rear of cabinet, just above the H405 AC power con-

Dimensions:

EHx5 Wx205D

Weight:

13 Ibs

Cables:

troller

17-001962-01 to battery backup unit

70-20369-2F to battery backup umt
17-01498-01 to XTC module

17-01549-01

troller

DEC

power

bus

cable to

H405

power

con-

17-01569-01 AC/DC OK to DWMBA/B module
17-01666-01 control/status to regulators on VAXBI side

17-01497-02 control'status to regulators on XMI side
17-01447-01 bulk power Lo regulators on VAXBI mde
17-01446-01 bulk power to regulators on XMI mde
17-01570-01 power to front and rear blowers
17-01501-01 wput from AC power controller

Service From:

Rear of cabinet, door open

Tools Required:

Flat screwdniver

Diagnostics:

AC mput and power regulator indicator hights will hght

The H7206 power and logic unit contains the fan/power and logic modules.
The fan/power module functions are:
e

AC to 300VDC conversion

24\VDC to blowers

DEC power bus logic

Control panel key switch interface

The logic module functions are:
e

AC OK and DC OK control for system

Battery backup unit control logic

Door interlock logic

Power Subsystem

10-17

10.8.2 H7206 Power and Logic Unit Switches and Indicators

The H7206 power and logic unit has three indicators and one
resei switch, vigible from the front of the cabinet.

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Switches and Indicators

Figure 10-8:

14V BIAS

LED

od o

SHUTDOWN

OJ—-—-"/" LED

13v BIAS
LED

Il cxmual

RESET
SWITCH

msp-0080-89

10-18

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

The power and logic unit consists of an AC to DC rectifier and filter, a
fan/power module, and a logic module. The unit has three indicator LEDs

and one reset switch.

The green +13V bias LED lights to indicate when the bias supply on the
fan/power module is working.
WARNING: When the +13V bias LED is unlit, do not assume that the 300V

bulk supply is deenergized. This LED does not indicate the presence or
absence of the 300V bulk supply.
The green +14V bias LED lights to indicate that the bias supply is available
to the logic board.
When lit, the red shutdown LED indicates a partial or complete power
shutdown. Power shutdowns occur when there is an overtemperature

condition, the VAXBI or XMI access door is open, or airflow in the cabinet
1s inadequate.

After deternining the cause of the power shutdown, restart the system

using the front control panel. The red shutdown LED should go off when
the system is restarted.

Power Subsystem

10-19

10.9 H7206 Power and Logic Unit Removal and
Replacement
Remova or replace the H7206 power and logic unit using
a flat ecrewdriver. The assembly is held in place by six
hex screws. There are 11 cables. You may want to mark
the cnbles when removing them to simplify reconnection.
If you cannot disconnect some cables from the front of the
machine, remove the plenum to access the connectors (see
Section 10.7).
WARNING: High voltages are present in the
H7206 power and logic
unit. After power has been removed, wait at least 2 minutes before
working on the unit.

Figure 10-10:

H7206 Power and Logic Unit Removal (Top View)

meb-0081-88

10-20

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

REMOVAL

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.
Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off
position. Unplug the system power cord.

Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.

Open the front and rear doors.

Working from the front of the cabinet, disconnect the 17-01501-01 AC
input cable from J1 (see Figure 10-9).
Disconrect the 17-01549-01 DEC power bus cable from J13.

Disconnect the 17-01447-01 bulk power cable from J3.

See @ in

Figure 10-10.

10. If the system has a H7231-N battery backup unit, disconnect the 70-

20396-2F cable from J6 and the 17-00962-01 cable from J12. See .

11. Disconnect the 17-01570-01 blower cable from J2. See ®.
12. Disconnect the 17-01498-01 XTC cable from J16. See ®.
13. Disconnect the 17-01569-01 AC/DC OK cable from J11. See (®.
14. Disconnect the 17-01666-01 control/status cable from J9. See @.

15. Disconnect the 17-01497-02 control/status cable from J14. See ®.
16. Working from the rear of the cabinet, use a flat screwdriver to remove
the six hex screws.

17. Slide the unit out of the cabinet.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 17 above.

When reinstalling the unit, make sure the locating tang on the front
end of the unit engages the locating stud on the front shelf.

Power Subsystem

10-21

10.10 H7206 Fan Removal and Replacement
Remove the H7206 power and logic unit’s top cover to access
the fan (part number 12-24701-068). There are six screws

and one cable. Use a flet screwdriver and a small Phillips
screwdriver to remove the fan.

Figure 10-11:

H7206 Fan Removal

msp-0082-88

10-22

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

REMOVAL
1.

Remove the power and logic unit from the cabinet (see Section 10.9).

Using a flat screwdniver, remove the top cover by removing two screws.
See @ in Fagure 10-11.

Disconnect the fan cable from J8 on the power/fan module by pulling

Using a small Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws that attach

Remove the fan.

out the 2-pin connector.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 5 above.

The fan is powered by the same +24VDC used to run the main system
blowers. There 15 no fault indication if the fan stops.
When the cabinet doors are open, the power and logic unit depends entirely
on its internal fan for cooling. When working on the machine, make visual
checks to see if the fan is operating.

Power Subsystem

10-23

10.11 H405 AC Power Controller
The H405 AC power controller is located in the right lower
rear corner of the csbinet. The assembly comes in two
models: the H405-E for 60 Hz systems and the H405-F for
50 Hz systems.

H405 AC Power Controller (Rear View)

Figure 16-12:

H405 AC POWER
CONTROLLER
map-0083-89

10-24

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-8:

HA405 AC Power Controller Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

H405-E 160 Hz)

Location:

Lower nght rear corner of cabinet

Dimensicns:

120mm Hx75wm Wx15min D

Weight:

34 b

Cables:

17-01501.01 AC input to power and lognc unit

H405-F (60 He)

17-01549-01 DEC power bus to H7206 power and logic urut
17.01815-01 to 50 Hz transformer
17-00365-03 to battery hackup urut
17-00365-03 to disks
17-01844-0] to temperaiure sensor

Service From:

Rear of cabinet. door open

Tools Required:

Large Phillips and flat ecrewdnivers

Disgnostics:

Three power phase indicator lights on the H405-E will Light to wadsca¢ that three-phase power 12 present at power-up

In 60 Hz svstems, the H405-E AC power controller routes 3-phase, 208VAC
power to the output connector J2, used to connect power to the H7206 power
and logic unit. For 50 Hz systems, the same output is first routed to the
transformer (part number 16-28393-01) which lowers the phase voltages to
the required input range of the H7206.

The H405 AC power controller monitors the state of the cabinet thermostat
mounted at the top of the cabinet. The thermostat is a normally closed
thermal switch The H405 also monitors the sense switch integral to the
main circwt breaker. The sense switch is normally closed when the circuit
breaker 1s in the On position.

If the thermal switch opens (overtemperature condition) or the sense switch
opens (main circuit breaker is Off), the H405 removes power from the
cabinet by open: arcuiting its output signal, Fail Safe Enable. The batiery
backup unit, if included. 15 also disabled from delivering its 250VDC source
to the H7206 power and logic unit.

Pcwer Subsystem

10-25

10.12 H405 AC Power Controller Removal and
Replacement
Working mainly from the rear of the cabinet, remove or
replace the H405 AC power controller using a large Phillips
screwdriver. The assembly has six captive screws and seven
cables.

H405 AC Power Controller Removal

)

Q90

\QQQOQ

Figure 10-13:

meb-0084-89

10-26

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

WARNING: The H405 AC power controller is heavy. Exercise caution when
lifting and mouing this unit.

REMOVAL

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off

position.

Unplug the system power cord.

Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.

Open the front and rear doors.

Working from the front of the cabinet, disconnect the 17-0150101 AC 1nput cable from J2 by twisting the black connector ring
counterclockwise. If the system has a 50 Hz transformer, disconnect

the 17-01815-01 cable from J2. See @ in Figure 10-13.

Disconnect the 17-01549-01 DEC power bus cable from J1. See ©.
If the power system includes an H7231-N battery backup unit,

disconnect the 17-00365-03 cable from J5. See ®.

10. Disconnect the 17-01844-01 temperature sensor cable from J9. See ®.
11. gisconnect the 17-01833-01 fail safe enable cable from J€ and J7. See

12 At the rear of the cabinet, use a flat screwdriver to remove the two hex

screws at the top of the subassembly. See ®.

13. Using a large Phillips screwdriver, remove the six screws that hold the

AC power controller 1n place. See (9.

14. Pull the AC power controller toward you and remove it.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 14 above.

NOTE: Route the 17.01844-01 and 17-01833-01 cables away from the
transformer (50 Hz systems only).

Power Subsystem

10-27

10.13 50 Hz Transformer
The
A transforme. is required for 50 Hz eystems.
directly
cabinet,
the
of
fioor
the
on
transformer i: located
below the power and logic unit.

Figure 10-14:

TAANSEOAMER

{60 M2 SYSTEMS |

10-28

50 Hz Transtormer (Front View)

mab-00B5-89

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-9:

50 Hz Transformer Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

16-28393-01

Location:

Lower left front of calnnet

Dimensions:

65 Hx6 Wx10°D

Weight:

40 Ibe

Cables:

18.01815-01 to H405-F AC power controller

Service From:

Front of cabinet. door open

Tools Required:

Flat screwdniver

17-01501-01 to H7206 power and logac unit

Power Subsystem

10-29

10.14 50 Hz Transformer Rernoval and Replacement
Working from the front of the cabinet, remove the
transformer using a flat ecrewdriver. The transformer has
gix screws and two power cables.

Figure 10-15:

50 Hz Transtiormer Removal

INPUT

380V

‘

&
2

ouTPUT

INPUT

L 416V

OUTPUT

Rk
msb-0035-89

10-30

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

WARNING: 7b avoid high voltage shock, a round, threaded cap is provided
to cover the unused inlet connector. @ When replacing, rewiring, or
reconnecting the transformer, make sure that the cap is properly installed.
The cap fits onto either the 380V (J2) or the 416V (J1) inlet connector.
WARNING: The 50 Hz transformer is heavy. Exercise caution when lifting
and mouing this unit.

REMOVAL

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.
Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.
Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off
position.

Unplug the system power cord.
Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.

At the front of the cabinet, use a flat screwdriver to remove the six #1032 screws securing the sheet metal panel. This panel 15 located below
the power and logic unit.

Disconnect the 17-01815-01 power input cable from J1 (416V) or J2
(380V). See Figure 10-15.
8.

Disconnect the 17-01501-01 power output cable from J3.

Remove the six screws that attach the transformer to the cabinet rails.

10. Remove the transformer.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 10 above.

Power Subsystem

10-31

10.15 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit
The optional H7231-N battery backup unit supplies 300V
power to the system upon power failure. It is located in
the horizontal mounting space just below the system blower,
and to the left of the power and logic unit as viewed from
the rear of the cabinet.

Figure 10-16:

H7231 BATTERY

BACKUP UNIT

H7231-N Battery Backup Unit (Rear View)

—

(OPTIONAL:

)

10-32

msb-0086-88

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 10-10:

H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Specifications

Persmeter

Description

Part Number:

H7231-N

Location:

Lower third of cabinet, just below the system blower and next to
the H7206 power and logic umt

Dimensions:

2Hzx17TWz15"D

Weight:

35 lbs

Cables:

17-00562-01 control /status cable to power and logic umt
17-01833-01 fa) safe ensble cable to AC power controller
70-20396-2F power cable to power and logic unut

17-00365-03 AC hne to AC power controller
Service From:

Front and rear of cabinet, doors open

Tools Required:

3’8" putdnver, flat screwdniver, phers

Power Subsystem

10-33

10.16 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Removal and
Replacement
Working from the front and rear of the cabinet, remove
or replace the H7231-N battery backup unit using a fiat
screwdriver. The assembly has two screws and four cables.

Figure 10-17:

H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Removal

J22

- J20

J19 (NOT USED;)

”'@/m mmmmwm
!l

N
v

SELECT SWITCH

10-34

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

meb-0087-89

WARNING: The H7231-N battery backup unit is heavy.
when lifting or moving this unit.

Exercise caution

REMOVAL
1

Perform ar orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off
position.

Unplug the system power cord.

Wait 2 minutes for the capactors to discharge.

Open the front and rear doors.

If necessary, remove the air intake grill and plenum to access the cable

connections (see Section 10.7).

Using a flat screwdriver, remove the two screws that attach the 1700962-01 control'status cable to J18.

Disconnect the 70-20396-2F power cable from J9.
nutdriver, disconnect the ground strap.

Using a 3/8 inch

10 Disconnect the 17-00365-03 AC hine cable from J22.
11. Dasconnect the 17-01833-01 fail safe enable cable from J20.
12. At the front of the cabinet, use a 3/8 inch nutdriver to remove the two
nuts that secure the battery backup unit in its mounting bracket.
13 Shide the battery backup unit toward vou and hft it out of the mo wnting
bracket.

REPLACEMENT

Reverse steps 1 through 13 above.

Power Subsystem

10-35

10.17 H7231-N Battery Backup Unit Installation
The H7231-N battery backup unit is a field-installable option.
The unit, mounting bracket, hardware, and cables are
included in the H7231-P Installation Kit.

Battery Backup Unit Cable Installation

0O C 00 Q00

000 O

Figure 10-18:

msb-0088-80

10-36

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

10.17.1 Install the Battery Backup Unit Cables
Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

|98

Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off

Noe
o e

position.

Unplug the system power cord.

Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.
Open the front and rear doors.

Connect the 17-00365-03 AC input cable to J5 on the H405 AC power

controller (see Figure 10-13).

Connect the 17-00962-01 cable to J12 on the H7206 power and logic
unit

Connect the 70-20396-2F cable to J6 on the H7206 power and logic unit.
NOTE: Be sure that this cable is never connected to any unit other than
the H7206 or the battery backup unit.
10. Find the fail safe enable cable.

It is shipped with the system and is
located underneath the H405 AC power controller. Connect the 1701833-01 fail safe enable cable to J6 and J7 on the H405 AC power
controller.

11. Route the cables through the clearance space at the right of the H7206

power and logic unit. See @ in Figure 10-18.

12 Install

the eight Tinnerman nuts. See B. Four nuts are installed on

the front rails, twe nuts on each side rail.

Power Subsystem

10-37

10.17.2 Install the Mounting Bracket
1.

At the front of the cabinet, slide in the mounting bracket (see
Figure 10-19) and secure it by installing four Phillips screws into the
Tinnerman nuts on the front rails. Do not tighten.

Install the two long Philiips screws on the left side rail.

At the rear of the cabinet, install the two spacers and two flathead
screws behind the nght side rail. Use pliers to line the spacer up behind
the rail 8o that you can install the flathead screw through the spacer,
rail, and Tinnerman nut. Then tighten all screws.
Mounting Bracket Installation

]

(BlelB 000 30N B33

Figure 10-19:

msb-0085-89

10-38

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

10.17.3 Install the Unit
1. At the front of the cabinet, slide the battery backup unit into the
mounting bracket (see Figure 10-20).

2 Using a 3/8 inch nutdriver, install the two nuts on the mounting bracket
studs to secure the unit. See @ 1n Fagure 10-20.
3 Set the voltage select switch. See &® For 60 Hz systems, set the switch
to the right (115V). For 50 Hz systems, set the switch to the left (250V).
At the rear of the cabinet, remove the plenum (see Section 10.7).
Using a flat screwdriver, install the two screws that attach the 1700962-01 cable to J18 (see Figure 10-17).

6. Connect the 70-20396-2F cable to J9.
connect the cable’s ground strap.

Using a 3/8 inch nutdnver,

Connect the 17-00365-03 cable to J22 and the 17-01833-01 cable to J20.
Set the voltage select switch as in step 3.

Replace the plenum. Shut the doors.

Figure 10-20:

Battery Backup Unit installation

{00 0rCOOGCD %

Power Subsystem

10-39

1:010.0.0:9.0.0.6.0.8000:0.6.0.4.80.8.¢.800¢06860¢06850680808888049084
000
00809000000 008¢040000001
PO 000V E0000000808
(9:9:0.0:0.0:4.6.0.0.0.0.90.0,0.088600600806006008608000808089¢
0:6.9/0.0.0.0.06,000.86:6.6.6.9,¢0.0.680.80:90.$60¢9056309008909]
80004
b010:0.06.0.0810.50.06.8:9:0080.0080.900800060800800¢
10¢.0.070,4:0.680.0.8.0.9.¢.¢.0.60.8.08¢.60.99008869.¢989090084
Fi0.0.0.4:9.6.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.0956.0.306060900006888¢80¢1
9:8.0.0.0.66.9.9009.09.0.0.8860908509500048000902

HOOOOOO0OO

KOO

XX KX XK XXX

0.0:0.0.0.6.0.9.0.0.0.00.80.008¢0084808¢650¢01

F010.8,0.0.0.0/669,0.0¢$,88.080008006803¢04
10.6.9.6.0.0.096000.¢¢55080000¢00089¢

P00 03084.098¢:6596.8¢5.¢00486844
1:6.9.0.0.0.9.0.0,0.0.0.000.96¢8480084
108 0.99.0.6.99.08¢06¢860549¢04
0:6.0.6.0.0.6.0.¢.60$90.009468¢.
}0.6.0.6.0.6.0.9,0,0.¢4.9.8¢3
¢34
b0.8.0.6.0.:6.0.0.0.89,6.8.49
K0 ¢4
19.8.9:9.0.4.8:0.0.0.6.

WHERAHAUAKKAXX
1,0.8.0.9.0,9.0.9.9.¢4

€,9.0,0.4.410.94
HHAKAXX

9.8 .94

XHX
X

XXXXX

XAXAXKX

D0.4.2.0.4.9,9.¢
KXXXXXXAXXX
he.80.8.8.6.6.4.8 408

)0.6.6.5.0.4.¢,6.0.¢.0.9¢.¢4
XN XA XA AKX
XXX

IAX
X
XX XXX
XX

$0.9.0.9.0.0.0.9.0,0,0.0.0.9.0.988084

1910.0.00.6.68.600086060088004
XA XX XXX
X XX 00000000
§8.0.0.0.0.0.00 0066494600086 &08004
P00.00.00.0.9.066.6.0.004950¢00088004

P90.00.0.089.0.9050680060004¢8000¢064
04
90040
009 0359066086084
D040 800000
8008084
P0.0.0.0.0.0.06.080.0.0.8.0.8000040.08866¢0
b 8.8.0.0.0.0.60.0.66.0.00¢.8¢808060.5466005090¢90!

}9.0.9/6.0.0.0.9,00.600500.9,80.0,0.00.6000$0$00608800.044
P00, 06'0.800.08. 000000 00.00.0¢0.00600080808098804]
10:0.0.9.010:00.8.0000.54.6990¢0.6800000808499.0090¢80004
16.4.6.0:9.4.6.0.:0.0.0.0.0.0..9.0.9.0.0:0.4.0.9.0.8.¢.6090.0600900999.¢0]
1
}0.9:6.070.0.0.0.0°0.0300.0.0.0.0.6.0.9.9.:0.0.0.8.0.0.0¢.6.09.0,09.0$0$008489

}9:0.0.9.0.6.6.0.0.6.0.0.6:0.6.0.0.0.¢.0.00.0.00.64$98¢069.09$$0906008600.04
00
8000000
0600805000510
109.6.6:9:0.0.004:6:9.0.6.0.9.0.0.9.6.6900$80.0.

Chapter 11

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem
This chapter describes the field-replaceable units of the cabinet and units
that monitor and control the interior environment of the cabinet. Sections
include:

Door and Filter Removal and Replacement (Front)

Door and Filter Removal and Replacement (Rear)

Airflow Sensor Removal and Replacement

Temperature Sensor Removal and Replacement

Blower Assembly Specifications

Blower Assembly, Front and Rear

Blower Assembly Removal and Replacement

Side Panel Removal

Cabiret and Airflow Subsystem

11-1

11.1 Door and Fiiter Removal and Replacement
(Frent)
Both the front and rear doors have air filters that need to
be replaced periodically. Figure 11-1 shows the inside of the
front door.

Figure 11-1:

Front Door (Inside View)
o

msb-0082-88

11=-2

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 11-1:

Front Cabinet Door and Alr Filter Specifications

Parameter

Description

Front Door:

70-24623-01

Dimensions:

2825 W x 56" D

Weight:

31 lbs

Air Filters:

12.11255-23 — 175" Wz 9' D

12-11255-24 — 185" W x 12.5" D (ayr intake)

12-11255-25 — 185" Wx 10" D

Tools Required:

3/8" and 11/32" nutdnvers

REMOVAL OF DOORS

Remove the rronnd strap. which is attached to the front door, using a

Pull up the pin in the top hinge and lock in place.

3’8 inch nutdnriver.

Pull up and hold the pin in the bottom hinge as you lift the door up to

remove it from the cabinet.

REPLACEMENT OF DOORS

Put the door into position at the hinges and then release the lock holding

Pull up the bottom pin and release it to secure the door.

the top pin.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF AIR FILTERS

It is especially important that the filters in the center of the front door and
ai the botiom of the rear door be clean. These filters cover the air intake
area.

Three filters are covered with a grill that must be removed to replace the
air filter.

Use an 11/32 inch nutdriver to remove the grill.

Pull off the old filter and stick on the new one.

Reinstall the grills (they protect against electromagnetic interference).

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-3

11.2 Door and Filter Removal and Replacement
(Rear)
Figure 11-2 shows the inside of the rear door.

Figure 11-2:

114

Rear Door (Inside View)

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

Table 11-2: Rear Cablinet Door and Alr Fiiter Specifications
Parameter

Description

Rear Door:

70.24124-01

Dimensions:

26" Wx 415" D

Weight:

20 Ihe

Air Filters:

12-11255-17 — 26 Wz 15.5" D (amir intake)
12-11256-22 — 22" Wz 95" D

Tools Required:

3/8" and 11/32" putdnvers

For the removal and replacement procedures for the rear door and filters,
see Section 111

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-§

11.3 Airflow Sensor Removal and Replacement
The airflow sensor (see Figure 11-3) is mounted inside the
cabinet above the XMI power regulators, to the left of the
temperature sensor. The airflow sensor regulates the two
blowers and shuts down the power regulators if the airflow
in the cabinet is inadequate.

Figure 11-3:

Alrflow Sensor (Front View)

mee-0064-89

Table 11-3:

Alrflow Sensor Specifications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

12-25024-11

Location:

From the front, the sensor is above the outlet grill of the XMl power reg-

ulstors and to the left of the temperature sensor.

Bigna] Cable:

17-01570-01, to both blowers and to the H7206 PAL umt

Power:

+24 V (common to main blowers)

Bervice From:

Front of the cabinet, doors open

Tools Required:

Large and small Phullips screwdnivers

i1-6

Wire clipper

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

OPERATION
If the airflow sensor detects inadequate airflow, it signals the H7206 power
and lognc (PAL) unit. After 30 seconds the H7206 unit asserts the Interlock
Inhibit signals to the XMI and VAXBI power regulators. The red LED on
the H7206 PAL unit hghts. The AC power 1s not affected.

Turn the system off at the control panel as you investigate the cause of
the problem To restart the system, use the front control panel. If the red
LED on the H7206 stays on when one side of the system powers up, the
problem may be an Interlock switch or the overtemperature switch in the
H7215 regulator. If, however, both sides stay down, check the bias LEDs.
If they are nt, check the airflow sensor signal. If it is low, indicating normal
operating conditions, the H7206 PAL unit needs to be replaced.
REMOVAL

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off
Unplug the system power cord.

Open the front and rear doors.

Unplug at the connector.

Wait 2 minutes for the capactors to discharge.

Clip and remove the tiewrap around the sensor.

position.

Push down on top of the metal bracket to pop out one side so that you

can remove the sensor. Leave the bracket in the grillwork or mark the
exact location so that the new sensor is placed in the same spot.
REPLACEMENT

Slip the new sensor in under the bracket and push the end of the bracket

Secure in place with a tiewrap (90-07031-00).

back into the grill.

Reattach at the connector.

Reverse steps 1 through 6 in the REMOVAL section above.

Cabinet and Airfiow Subsystem

11-7

11.4 Temperature Sensor Removal and
Replacement
The temperature sensor ( see Figure 11-4) is mounted inside
the cabinet above the XMl power regulators, to the right of
the airflow sensor. When the system overheats, the sensor
signals the H405 AC power controller to shut down the
gystem.

Figure 11-4:

Temperature Sensor (Front View)

msb-0095-86

11-8

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 11—4:
Parameter
Part Number:

Location:

Temperature Sensor Speclfications
Description
17-01844-01, sensor and cable to J9 on the H415 power con-

troller

From the front. the sensor 18 ebove the outlet grill of the XMI power reg-

ulators and to the nght of the murflow sensor.

Power:

H405 power controller

Threshold:

75°C (16 7°F)

Service From:

Inmde the rear door

Tools Required:

Small Phillips screwdrver

OPERATION

When the temperature sensor reaches its threshold, it signals the H405
AC power controller to cut off all power. When the sensor cools down, the
power 1s restored automatically.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The temperature sensor *; permanently attached to the cable that goes to
the power controller.

To remove a temperature sensor.
1

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.
Pull the main circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off

ook

Pull the cable up through the system.

Wait 2 minutes for the capacitors to discharge.

position and unplug the system power cord

Open the front and rear doors.

Unplug the cable at J9 on the H405 power control er.

‘ith a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw from the bracket that

holds the sensor.

Install the new sensor in the same place. Reverse steps 1 through 7 above.

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-8

11.5 Blower Assembly Specifications
Two blowers are located in the center of the cabinet, just
below the XMI and VAXBI card cages. The mounting plate
with the four captive screws (see Figure 11-5) is part of the
blower assembly (12-27848-01).

Blower Assembly

| Sy
— 1 Sy

Figure 11-5:

11-16

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

Table 11-5: Blower Assembly Spacifications
Parameter

Description

Part Number:

12-27848-01; two used

Location:

Front and rear of the lower cabinet area

Dimensions:

15 2 157

Weight:

91bs

Power:

+24V

Signal Cable:

17.01570-01,

the

H7206

PAL

umt

and

the

wmrflow

sepn-

gor

Service From:

Front and rear of cabinet doors open

Tools Required:

Large Phulhps and 1/4" filat screwdnvers

Each system has two blowers to provide the required airflow within the
cabinet. If the airflow sensor de.ects inadequate airflow, it signals the
H7206 power and logic (PAL) unit. After 30 seconds the H7206 unit asserts
the Interlock Inhibit signals to the XMI and VAXBI power regulators. The
red LED on the H7206 PAL unit lights. The AC power is not affected.

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-11

11.6 Blower Assembly, Front and Rear
Figure 11-6 and Figure 11-7 show the two blowers, each with
their protective grillwork in place. Although the mounting
of the two units is somewhat different, once you remove the
nrotective grillwork from the rear blower assembly the same
removal procedures apply to both blowers.

Front Blower

;

°r

rlr___

Figure 11-6:

msb-0097-86

11-12

VAX 6000—400 Options and Maintenance

Figure 11-7:

Rear Blower

3500000-0,3 [} YoPR

CRT AOID B
c‘ v-i‘u

30 BN

onPL e,
v

s P

—~—

msb-0088-89

Cabinet and Airfiow Subsystem

11-13

11.7 Blower Assembly Removal and Replacement
To remove the rear blower, you must first remove the
protective grillwork.
You do not meed to remove the
grillwork from in front of the blower in front, as it can be
lifted off with the plenum.

Figure 11-8:

\Sc./‘

\Bbi

11-14

VAX 6000400 Options and Maintenance

o] [®

Blower Assembly Removal (Rear View)

msb-0088-80

Perform an orderly shutdown of the system.

Turn the upper key switch on the front control panel to the Off position.

Pull the circuit breaker on the AC power controller to the Off position.

REMOVAL

Unplug the system power cord.

Open the front or rear door to access the blower to be replaced.

Wait 2 minutes for the capaators to discharge.

Callout @ in Figure 11-7 shows the four captive screws that must be
Ioosened to Lift off the metal grill in front of the rear blower. Figure 11-8
shows the rear blower with the metal gnll removed.

The plenum must now be lifted off away from the blower.
a

Unplug the power cord and push it through the hole on the left
panel

See Figure 11-8.

Remove the two #10-32 screws inside the top panel and one screw
at the left on the panel at the back of the plenum.

Shift the plenum to the left and lift it off from the four screws.

REPLACEMENT
Tv replace the blower, reverse the steps above. Note that the blower has
two metal tabs at the bottom that shde 1nto slots 1n the cabinet.

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-1§

11.8 Side Panel Removal
The right side panel of the system cabinet is detachable, so
that the cabinet can be bolted to an expander cabinet.

Figure 11-9:

Side Panel Removal (Front View)
SIDE
PANEL

——

—

KEPNUTS
map-004
1 88

11-16

VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance

Table 11-6:

Side Panel Speclfications

Parameter

Description

Part Number:

70-19485-00

Location:

From the front, the pane! on the nght mde 18 removable.

Dimensions:

300 W

Woight:

3425 lbe

Bervice From:

Right mde of cabinet, a8 iewed from the front

Tools Required:

7/16" socket wrench

5T Hx34' D

For most configurations, expansion will be to the right of the system cabinet
To prepare for expansion, remove the side panel of the system cabinet as
fellows:
1

Open the front and rear doors of the system cabinet and remove the

doors by lifung them off their huinges.
2

Using a 7716 inch socket wrench, remove the system cabinet's side panel
by removing the 12 kepnuts (see Figure 11-9) Carefully Iift the panel
when removing 1t so as not to damage the threaded bolts. Do not remove

the bolts.

3 Be ure attaching another cabinet, make sure the braided RFI shielding
and secunng clips are not damaged or missing. Check that any flexible
spring-strp type RF] gaskets are present in all the mounting holes.

The VAX 6000400 Installation Guide describes how to attach the system
cabinet to a VAXBI expander cabinet.

Cabinet and Airflow Subsystem

11-17

F0/0.0/0.4.8.0.0.6.06.0.6.0.0.05.80.00800.69008¢0¢6:¢6800¢6¢$8¢0.9.0.9904
110/0.0.0.9.6,9,0.8.000.00600008¢80608.0400066808050.665¢80¢69¢¢
19.0.0.8.0.0.0.8.0.5606888.08006908866040086080090806863¢4¢

PO 0000000080800 ¢60.906¢00¢00¢.6:0600640¢06¢
19.8.0.9¢.008090.86.86008080800008008096609090¢841
19.9.0.9.9.6.9.0.6.8.¢.098.08¢8¢5080¢0609¢6860806080886¢
HOCOOK XX

KK XCOO00
XK KNI
00
KX

LP000.0.9.9.9.8.0.000.908680864009040000480409:

0.0.6.9.8.9.0:06.¢6.8.¢.0080.80809060049860¢081

KRFEOCOOCOOGGOOOOOOU
XXX XX X
[18.9.0.0.0.0.0.6,0.6.8.0.0.4.9.¢.09.0.6.4004466¢3004
KX YICOOQ
OOQUOC
U XX X XX XK X
[.8.6.8.0.6.8.0.0.86909.000.6640604¢¢]

10.0.0.0.4,9.0.00.910 8000069090400t

..9.0.0.6.0.8.90.00.5¢$664¢90¢4809$¢
.0.0.0.9.0.9.88600868 08460041
$9.0.0,9:0.0.0.8.0.0.0.8.6:0.¢.6
48
19.9.4,0.6.8.0:0.6.0.6.¢.9.4.4.¢1

§.9.0.0.4 89096069901

HEHKXHHKX
XU XKK
}.0:0.0.4.0.0.0.¢.6¢¢
19,9.6:0.0.9
6.9

19.9:9.0.0.94

X
XXX
XXXXK

XAAAXAK
XXXAXAXAX

XX KHUAUXAKKXK
XXXX
XK XA XA
XUUXXH
KK KA KK KAX

KXXXAAXK
XK K AKXXKX
10.0.90.0.80.6000¢965804¢4
}8.6.0.0.6.8.4:9.0.9 6900080884691

10.0.0.9.0.0.4.8.0.9.0.9.0.4.9.0.¢.8.¢.6.¢0
0.9.0.0.6.0.¢.0.0.809.09590088
840684

10.9.8.9:9.0.0.0.0.0.¢60.909088006¢48068]
P 00.0.0.0.0080806000008000068080¢¢4
0$6.6.9,8.8.0.9.90.¢.9080080090846¢8009373004

09.0.9.0.0.6,0.0.0,08.08000.9890¢0088¢¢05084
10.6.0:0.4.90.0.6¢.09
000809 088948088¢8880¢84¢84
DO P

0000090.0008090.00000.900008899080808]

19.0.0.0.¢.8.0.0.0.9.0.880.8.0.060808004684000.0¢0046044
[9.2,:9:8.9.0.0080099.980.0.0.6960.0808066$68566,0064401
.0:0.0,0.0,0.8.0.000.0.00.8:000.808.08 0040888004090

006¢44

19:0:10.9.9.9.0,8.0:9.0.9.0.9.0:0.0,0.0.9.0.0.0.8.¢.8.0.0.¢:0:6.9.0.9.9.0.0.9.0.:0.¢¢.¢.9¢

b0.0.0.0.9.4:9.9.0.8.0.80.8.¢.9..9.¢,6.0.0.0.06:0.0,6,¢.3:0.9.0.66.9.0.6,0.9.4.4.30,¢.0.

09,6.0.9.9,0.0.0.0.:0.00.09.9089990.089086868690006090$68.60640084

b0.9.0.0.0.99.9.0.9:6.8.90.8.0.$.000.9090.09808068680908680606¢6606000]

Appendix A

Troubleshooting the System
Table A-1 gives a checklisi for troubleshooting a system that will not

power-up and boot. For additional information on troubleshooting, see the
following:

Chapter 2, Diagnostics
Sectaon 3.6, KAB4A Self-Test Results: Console Display
Section 3.7, KA64A Self-Test Results: Module LEDs
Section 3 8, KA64A Self-Test Results: XGPR Register
Section 3.9, ROM-Based Diagnostics

Section 3.10, KA64A Self-Test — RBD 0

Section 3.11, CPU/Memory Interaction Tests — RBD 1
Section 3.12, VAX/DS Diagnostics
Section 4 3, FV64A Configuration Rules
Section 4.5, Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED
Section 4 6, Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register

Section 4 7, Vector Processor Tests — RBD 0 and RBD 1
Section 4 8, VAX/DS Dhagnostics

Section 5.2, MS62A Configuration Rules
Section 5.8, Memory Self-Test
Section 5.9, Memory Self-Test Errors
Section 510, MS62A Memory Tests — RBD 3

Section 513, MS62A Memory Installation
Section 6.4. DWMBA Tests — RBD 2

Section 7.6, XMI Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting the System

A-1

Section 8.6, VAXBI Troubleshooting
Appendix B, Console Error Messages

VAX 6000400 Owner's Manual

Chapter 3, Controls and Indicators
Chapter 6, System Self-Test and Troubleshooting

Table A~1:

Troubleshooting the System

Check

Comment